Alteon OSTM
Application Guide
Nortel 10Gb Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter®
Version 1.0
Part Number: 42C4911, January 2007
2350 Mission College Blvd.
Suite 600
Santa Clara, CA 95054
www.bladenetwork.net
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface 15
What You’ll Find in This Guide 16
SNMP v3.0 36
Configuring SNMP Trap Hosts 39
Securing Access to the Switch 43
RADIUS Authentication and Authorization 44
TACACS+ Authentication 48
42C4911, January 2007
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN 68
Port-based vs. Protocol-based VLANs 88
Trunk group configuration rules 96
Port Trunking Example 97
Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm 100
Link Aggregation Control Protocol 101
Configuring LACP 103
4
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port Fast Forwarding 115
Fast Uplink Convergence 116
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 121
Using ACL Filters 126
Summary of packet classifiers 126
Summary of ACL Actions 128
Understanding ACL Precedence 128
Using ACL Groups 129
ACL Metering and Re-marking 130
42C4911, January 2007
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS 134
Using 802.1p Priorities to Provide QoS 139
Routing Between IP Subnets 145
RIPv1 156
Configuration Guidelines 165
Configure IGMP Relay 166
Additional IGMP Features 168
FastLeave 168
IGMP Filtering 168
6
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Local Preference Attribute 180
Virtual Links 198
Router ID 199
Authentication 199
Host Routes for Load Balancing 202
OSPF Features Not Supported in This Release 203
42C4911, January 2007
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
OSPF Configuration Examples 204
Example 2: Virtual Links 207
Example 3: Summarizing Routes 211
Assigning VRRP Virtual Router ID 231
Configuring the Switch for Tracking 231
High Availability Configurations 233
Active-Active Configuration 233
Hot-Standby Configuration 238
8
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Ports 246
Appendix B: RADIUS Server Configuration Notes 253
Glossary 255
Index 257
42C4911, January 2007
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
10
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 1-1:Switch management on the BladeCenter management module 26
Figure 1-2:BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration 30
Figure 1-3:DHCP Relay Agent Configuration 31
Figure 2-1:Authenticating a Port Using EAPoL 69
Figure 3-1:Default VLAN settings 81
Figure 3-2:Port-based VLAN assignment 82
Figure 3-3:802.1Q tagging (after port-based VLAN assignment) 82
Figure 3-4:802.1Q tag assignment 83
Figure 3-5:802.1Q tagging (after 802.1Q tag assignment) 83
Figure 3-6:Example 1: Multiple VLANs with VLAN-Tagged Gigabit Adapters 85
Figure 4-1:Port Trunk Group 94
Figure 4-2:Port Trunk Group Configuration Example 97
Figure 5-1:Using Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree Group 111
Figure 5-2:Implementing Multiple Spanning Tree Groups 112
Figure 7-1:QoS Model 124
Figure 7-2:Layer 3 IPv4 packet 134
Figure 7-3:Layer 2 802.1q/802.1p VLAN tagged packet 139
Figure 8-1:The Router Legacy Network 145
Figure 8-2:Switch-Based Routing Topology 146
Figure 8-3:DHCP Relay Agent Configuration 154
Figure 11-1:iBGP and eBGP 172
Figure 11-2:Distributing Network Filters in Access Lists and Route Maps 175
Figure 11-3:BGP Failover Configuration Example 182
Figure 11-4:Route Aggregation and Default Route Redistribution 185
Figure 12-1:OSPF Area Types 189
Figure 12-2:OSPF Domain and an Autonomous System 190
Figure 12-3:Injecting Default Routes 197
Figure 12-4:OSPF Authentication 200
Figure 12-5:A Simple OSPF Domain 205
Figure 12-6:Configuring a Virtual Link 207
Figure 12-7:Summarizing Routes 211
Figure 13-1:Basic Layer 2 Failover 220
Figure 13-2:Two trunks, each in a different Failover Trigger 221
42C4911, January 2007
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 13-3:Two trunks, one Failover Trigger 222
Figure 13-4:A Non-VRRP, Hot-Standby Configuration 227
Figure 13-5:Active-Active Redundancy 228
Figure 13-6:Hot-Standby Redundancy 229
Figure 13-7:Active-Active High-Availability Configuration 233
Figure 13-8:Hot-Standby Configuration 239
12
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 1-1:
Table 1-2:
Table 1-3:
Table 1-4:
Table 1-5:
Table 4-1:
Table 5-1:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 7-4:
Table 7-5:
Table 8-1:
Table 8-2:
Table 8-3:
GbESM IP addresses, based on switch-module bay numbers 24
User Access Levels 47
Alteon OS-proprietary Attributes for RADIUS 47
Default TACACS+ Authorization Levels 49
Alternate TACACS+ Authorization Levels 49
Actor vs. Partner LACP configuration 101
Ports, Trunk Groups, and VLANs 106
Well-Known Protocol Types 126
Well-Known Application Ports 127
Well-Known TCP flag values 127
ACL Precedence Groups 128
Default QoS Service Levels 136
Subnet Routing Example: IP Address Assignments 148
Subnet Routing Example: IP Interface Assignments 148
Subnet Routing Example: Optional VLAN Ports 150
Table 13-1: VRRP Tracking Parameters 230
42C4911, January 2007
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
14
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
The Alteon OS Application Guide describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software
on the 10Gb Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter. For documentation on installing
the switch physically, see the Installation Guide for your GbE Switch Module (GbESM).
Who Should Use This Guide
This Application Guide is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in
configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet
concepts, IP addressing, Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration parameters.
42C4911, January 2007
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
This guide will help you plan, implement, and administer Alteon OS software. Where possible,
each section provides feature overviews, usage examples, and configuration instructions.
Part 1: Basic Switching
„
„
„
Chapter 1, “Accessing the Switch,” describes how to access the GbE Switch Module to
configure, view information and run statistics on the switch. This chapter also discusses
different methods to manage the switch for remote administrators using specific IP
addresses, authentication, Secure Shell (SSH), and Secure Copy (SCP).
Chapter 2, “Port-based Network Access Control,” describes how to authenticate devices
attached to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection characteristics. It prevents
access to ports that fail authentication and authorization. This feature provides security to
ports of the GbESM that connect to blade servers.
Chapter 3, “VLANs,” describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)
for creating separate network segments, including how to use VLAN tagging for devices
that use multiple VLANs. This chapter also describes Protocol-based VLANs, Private
VLANs, and Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
„
„
„
„
Chapter 4, “Ports and Trunking,” describes how to group multiple physical ports together
to aggregate the bandwidth between large-scale network devices.
Chapter 5, “Spanning Tree Group,” discusses how Spanning Trees configure the network
so that the switch uses the most efficient path when multiple paths exist.
Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree configurations.
Chapter 7, “Quality of Service,” discusses Quality of Service features, including IP filter-
ing using Access Control Lists, Differentiated Services, and IEEE 802.1p priority values.
Part 2: IP Routing
„
„
„
Chapter 8, “Basic IP Routing,” describes how to configure the GbE Switch Module for IP
routing using IP subnets, and DHCP Relay.
Chapter 9, “Routing Information Protocol,” describes how the Alteon OS software imple-
ments standard RIP for exchanging TCP/IP route information with other routers.
Chapter 10, “IGMP,” describes how the Alteon OS software implements IGMP Snooping
or IGMP Relay to handle multicast traffic efficiently.
16 „ Preface
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
„
ported in Alteon OS.
Chapter 12, “OSPF,” describes OSPF concepts, how OSPF is implemented in Alteon OS,
and examples of how to configure your switch for OSPF support.
„
tocol (VRRP) to ensure that network resources remain available if one GbE Switch Mod-
ule is removed for service.
Part 4: Appendices
„
Appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” discusses two tools for troubleshooting your switch—
monitoring ports and filtering session dumps.
„
Appendix B, “RADIUS Server Configuration Notes,” discusses how to modify RADIUS
configuration files for the Nortel Networks BaySecure Access Control RADIUS server, to
provide authentication for users of the GbE Switch Module.
42C4911, January 2007
Preface „ 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.
Table 1 Typographic Conventions
Typeface or
Symbol
Meaning
Example
AaBbCc123
This type is used for names of commands,
files, and directories used within the text.
View the readme.txtfile.
It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main#
prompts.
AaBbCc123
This bold type appears in command exam-
ples. It shows text that must be typed in
exactly as shown.
Main# sys
<AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command
To establish a Telnet session, enter:
examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace host# telnet <IP address>
the indicated text with the appropriate real
name or value when using the command. Do
not type the brackets.
This also shows book titles, special terms, or Read your User’s Guide thoroughly.
words to be emphasized.
[ ]
Command items shown inside brackets are host# ls [-a]
optional and can be used or excluded as the
situation demands. Do not type the brackets.
18 „ Preface
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
How to Get Help
If you need help, service, or technical assistance, see the "Getting help and
technical assistance" appendix in the Nortel 10Gb Ethernet Switch Module for
IBM BladeCenter Installation Guide.
42C4911, January 2007
Preface „ 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
20 „ Preface
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 1: Basic Switching
This section discusses basic switching functions. This includes how to access and manage the
switch:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Accessing the switch
Port-Based Network Access Control
VLANs
Port Trunking
Spanning Tree Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree and Protocol and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
22
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1
Accessing the Switch
The Alteon OS software provides means for accessing, configuring, and viewing information
accessing the switch and ways to secure the switch for remote administrators:
„
„
„
„
„
„
“Using Telnet” on page 29
“Using SNMP” on page 36
†
†
†
†
“RADIUS Authentication and Authorization” on page 44
“TACACS+ Authentication” on page 48
“LDAP Authentication and Authorization” on page 53
“Secure Shell and Secure Copy” on page 55
42C4911, January 2007
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Management module setup
The BladeCenter GbE Switch Module is an integral subsystem within the overall BladeCenter
system. The BladeCenter chassis includes a management module as the central element for
overall chassis management and control.
You can use the management module to configure and manage the GbE Switch Module. The
GbE Switch Module communicates with the management module(s) through its internal port
15 (MGT1) and port 16 (MGT2), which you can access through the 100 Mbps Ethernet port on
each management module. The factory default settings permit management and control access
to the switch module only through the management module, or the built-in serial port. You can
use the external Ethernet ports (EXT1-EXT7) on the switch module for management and con-
trol of the switch, by selecting this mode as an option through the management module config-
uration utility program (see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User’s Guide
publications for more information).
NOTE – Support for each management module is provided by a separate management port
(MGT1 and MGT2). One port is active, and the other port is used as a backup.
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses
Each GbE Switch Module must be assigned its own Internet Protocol address, which is used
for communication with an SNMP network manager or other transmission control protocol/
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) applications (for example, BootP or TFTP). The factory-default IP
address is 10.90.90.8x, where x corresponds to the number of the bay into which the GbE
Switch Module is installed. For additional information, see the Installation Guide. The man-
agement module assigns an IP address of 192.168.70.1xx, where xx corresponds to the number
of the bay into which each GbE Switch Module is installed, as shown in the following table:
Table 1-1 GbESM IP addresses, based on switch-module bay numbers
Bay number
Bay 7
Factory-default IP address
10.90.90.80
IP address assigned by MM
192.168.70.133
Bay 8
10.90.90.82
192.168.70.134
Bay 9
10.90.90.81
192.168.70.135
Bay 10
10.90.90.83
192.168.70.136
24 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
NOTE – Before you install the GbESM in Bay 8 or Bay 10, confirm that your blade
I/O Expansion adapter supports communication to these I/O bays.
Default Gateway
The default Gateway IP address determines where packets with a destination address outside
the current subnet should be sent. Usually, the default Gateway is a router or host acting as an
IP gateway to handle connections to other subnets of other TCP/IP networks. If you want to
access the GbE Switch Module from outside your local network, use the management module
to assign a default Gateway address to the GbE Switch Module. Choose I/O Module Tasks >
Configuration from the navigation pane on the left, and enter the default Gateway IP address
(for example, 192.168.70.125). Click Save.
Configuring management module for switch access
Complete the following initial configuration steps:
1. Connect the Ethernet port of the management module to a 10/100 Mbps network (with
access to a management station) or directly to a management station.
ment Module User’s Guide. The management module provides the appropriate IP
addresses for network access (see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User’s
Guide publications for more information).
3. Select Configuration on the I/O Module Tasks menu on the left side of the BladeCenter
Management Module window. See Figure 1-1.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 1-1 Switch management on the BladeCenter management module
4. You can use the default IP addresses provided by the management module, or you can
assign a new IP address to the switch module through the management module. You can
assign this IP address through one of the following methods:
„
„
Manually through the BladeCenter management module
Automatically through the IBM Director Configuration Wizard (available in
Director release 5.20.1)
NOTE – If you change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module, make sure that the switch
module and the management module both reside on the same subnet.
5. Enable the following features in the management module:
„
„
External Ports (I/O Module Tasks > Admin/Power/Restart > Advanced Setup)
External management over all ports (Configuration > Advanced Configuration)
This setting is required if you want to access the management network through the
external data ports (EXT1 - EXT6) and the external management port (EXT7) on the
GbE Switch Module.
26 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The default value is Disabledfor both features. If these features are not already enabled,
change the value to Enabled, then Save.
NOTE – In Advanced Configuration > Advanced Setup, enable “Preserve new IP configura-
tion on all switch resets,” to retain the switch’s IP interface when you restore factory defaults.
This setting preserves the management port’s IP address in the management module’s memory,
so you maintain connectivity to the management module after a reset.
You can now start a Telnet session, Browser-Based Interface (Web) session, a Secure Shell ses-
sion, or a secure HTTPS session to the GbE Switch Module.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
External management port setup
In addition to the internal management ports (MGT1 and MGT2), the 10Gb Ethernet
Switch Module (GbESM) also has an external management port (EXT7) to support
out-of-band management traffic. Port EXT7 allows you to perform data transfers without
taxing the data ports (EXT1-EXT6). Some commands (for example, software image transfers
such as /boot/gtimg) that initiate data transfers provide an option for choosing the port
over which to perform the transfer.
To use the external management port, you must configure the external management interface
and gateway, as shown in the following configuration example.
Configuring the external management interface
Complete the following steps to configure port EXT7 for external management:
1. Use Telnet to access the switch CLI, and configure the external management interface:
>> # /cfg/l3/if 249
(Select IP interface 249)
>> IP Interface 249# addr 100.20.10.3
>> IP Interface 249# ena
>> IP Interface 249# ..
>> Layer 3# gw 253
(Assign IP address for the interface)
(Enable the interface)
(Select gateway 253)
>> Default gateway 253# addr 100.20.10.5 (Assign IP address for the gateway)
>> Default gateway 253# ena
>> Default gateway 253# apply
>> Default gateway 253# save
(Enable the gateway)
(Make the configuration active)
(Save your changes)
Interface 249 and gateway 253 are used for switch management through port EXT7.
2. Enable port EXT7.
>> # /cfg/port ext7/ena
>> Port EXT7# apply
>> Port EXT7# save
(Enable port EXT7)
(Make the configuration active)
(Save your changes)
By default, port EXT7 is a member of management VLAN 4094.
Once the external management network is configured, you can start a Telnet session,
Browser-Based Interface (Web) session, a Secure Shell session, or a secure HTTPS session to
the GbESM. To access the GbESM through the external management port, use the IP address
for IP interface 249.
28 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using Telnet
Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through Telnet. Choose
I/O Module Tasks > Configuration from the navigation pane on the left. Select a bay number
and click Advanced Configuration > Start Telnet/Web Session > Start Telnet Session. A
Telnet window opens a connection to the Switch Module (requires Java 1.4 Plug-in).
Once you have configured the GbE Switch Module with an IP address and gateway, you can
access the switch from any workstation connected to the management network. Telnet access
provides the same options for user and administrator access as those available through the
management module, minus certain telnet and management commands.
To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, you can run the Telnet program on your
workstation and issue the Telnet command, followed by the switch IP address:
telnet <switch IP address> [-m|-mgt|-e|-ext7|-d|-data]
By default, the -m or -mgtoption for management ports is used. To use the internal
management port, specify the -mor -mgtoption. To use the external management port,
specify the -e or -ext7 option.
Connect to the Switch via SSH
The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a net-
work to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch
configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. For
more information, see “Secure Shell and Secure Copy” on page 55. For more information on
the CLI, see the Alteon OS Command Reference.
BOOTP Relay Agent
The GbE Switch Module can function as a Bootstrap Protocol relay agent, enabling the switch
to forward a client request for an IP address up to two BOOTP servers with IP addresses that
have been configured on the switch.
When a switch receives a BOOTP request from a BOOTP client requesting an IP address, the
switch acts as a proxy for the client. The request is then forwarded as a UDP Unicast MAC
layer message to two BOOTP servers whose IP addresses are configured on the switch. The
servers respond to the switch with a Unicast reply that contains the default gateway and IP
address for the client. The switch then forwards this reply back to the client.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 1-2 shows a basic BOOTP network example.
Boston
Raleigh
BladeCenter
BladeCenter
20.1.1.1
10.1.1.2
enter
BladeCenter acts as
BOOTP Relay Agent
BOOT Client
asks for IP from
BOOTP server
BOOTP Server
Figure 1-2 BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration
The use of two servers provide failover redundancy. The client request is forwarded to both
BOOTP servers configured on the switch. However, no health checking is supported.
Configuring the BOOTP Relay Agent
To enable the GbE Switch Module to be the BOOTP forwarder, you need to configure the
BOOTP server IP addresses on the switch, and enable BOOTP relay on the interface(s) on
which the BOOTP requests are received.
Generally, you should configure the command on the switch IP interface that is closest to the
client, so that the BOOTP server knows from which IP subnet the newly allocated IP address
should come.
Use the following commands to configure the switch as a BOOTP relay agent:
>> # /cfg/l3/bootp
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr <IP address>(IP address of BOOTP server)
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr2 <IP address>(IP address of 2nd BOOTP server)
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# on
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# off
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# cur
(Globally turn BOOTP relay on)
(Globally turn BOOTP relay off)
(Display current configuration)
Use the following command to enable the Relay functionality on an IP interface:
>> # /cfg/l3/if <interface number>/relay ena
30 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
DHCP Relay Agent
DHCP is described in RFC 2131, and the DHCP relay agent supported on the GbESM is
described in RFC 1542. DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol. The client sends messages
to the server on port 67 and the server sends messages to the client on port 68.
DHCP defines the methods through which clients can be assigned an IP address for a finite
lease period and allowing reassignment of the IP address to another client later. Additionally,
DHCP provides the mechanism for a client to gather other IP configuration parameters it needs
to operate in the TCP/IP network.
In the DHCP environment, the switch acts as a relay agent. The DHCP relay feature
(/cfg/l3/bootp) enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two
BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the switch.
When a switch receives a UDP broadcast on port 67 from a DHCP client requesting an IP
address, the switch acts as a proxy for the client, replacing the client source IP (SIP) and desti-
nation IP (DIP) addresses. The request is then forwarded as a UDP Unicast MAC layer mes-
sage to two BOOTP servers whose IP addresses are configured on the switch. The servers
respond as a a UDP Unicast message back to the switch, with the default gateway and IP
address for the client. The destination IP address in the server response represents the interface
address on the switch that received the client request. This interface address tells the switch on
which VLAN to send the server response to the client.
DHCP Relay Agent Configuration
To enable the GbESM to be the BOOTP forwarder, you need to configure the DHCP/BOOTP
server IP addresses on the switch. Generally, you should configure the command on the switch
IP interface closest to the client so that the DHCP server knows from which IP subnet the
newly allocated IP address should come.
The following figure shows a basic DHCP network example:
GbESM
DHCP
Server
BladeCenter
Figure 1-3 DHCP Relay Agent Configuration
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
In GbESM implementation, there is no need for primary or secondary servers. The client
request is forwarded to the BOOTP servers configured on the switch. The use of two servers
provide failover redundancy. However, no health checking is supported.
Use the following commands to configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent:
>> # /cfg/l3/bootp
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr2
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# on
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# off
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# cur
(Set IP address of BOOTP server)
(Set IP address of 2nd BOOTP server)
(Globally turn BOOTP relay on)
(Globally turn BOOTP relay off)
(Display current configuration)
Additionally, DHCP Relay functionality can be assigned on a per interface basis. Use the fol-
lowing command to enable the Relay functionality:
>> # /cfg/l3/if <interface number>/relay ena
32 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using the Browser-Based Interface
Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through a Web session. Choose
I/O Module Tasks > Configuration from the navigation pane on the left. Select a bay number
and click Advanced Configuration > Start Telnet/Web Session > Start Web Session. A
browser window opens a connection to the Switch Module.
The Browser-based Interface (BBI) provides access to the common configuration, manage-
ment and operation features of the GbE Switch Module through your Web browser. For more
information, refer to the BBI Quick Guide.
By default, BBI access is enabled on the switch (/cfg/sys/access/http ena).
Configuring BBI Access via HTTP
To enable BBI access on the switch via HTTP, use the following command:
/cfg/sys/access/http ena
The management module requires the default HTTP web server port (port 80) to access the
BBI. However, you can change the default Web server port with the following command:
/cfg/sys/access/wport<x>
For workstation access to your switch via the Browser-Based Interface, open a Web browser
window and type in the URL using the IP interface address of the switch, such as http://
10.10.10.1.
Configuring BBI Access via HTTPS
The BBI can also be accessed via a secure HTTPS connection over management and data
ports.
To enable BBI Access on the switch via HTTPS, use the following command:
/cfg/sys/access/https/access ena
To change the HTTPS Web server port number from the default port 443, use the following
command:
/cfg/sys/access/https/port <x>
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Accessing the BBI via HTTPS requires that you generate a certificate to be used during the key
exchange. A default certificate is created the first time HTTPS is enabled, but you can create a
new certificate defining the information you want to be used in the various fields.
>> /cfg/sys/access/https/generate
Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: <country code>
State or Province Name (full name) []: <state>
Locality Name (eg, city) []: <city>
Organization Name (eg, company) []: <company>
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []: <org. unit>
Common Name (eg, YOUR name) []: <name>
Email (eg, email address) []: <email address>
Confirm generating certificate? [y/n]: y
Generating certificate. Please wait (approx 30 seconds)
restarting SSL agent
The certificate can be saved to flash for use if the switch is rebooted by using the apply and
save commands.
When a client (e.g. web browser) connects to the switch, they will be asked if they accept the
certificate and can verify that the fields are what expected. Once BBI access is granted to the
client, the BBI can be used as described in the BBI Quick Guide.
The BBI is organized at a high level as follows:
Context buttons – allow you to select the type of action you wish to perform. The Configura-
tion button provides access to the configuration elements for the entire switch. The Statistics
button provides access to the switch statistics and state information. The Dashboard button
allows you to display settings and operating status of a variety of switch features.
Navigation Window – provides a menu list of switch features and functions, as follows:
„
System – this folder provides access to the configuration elements for the entire switch.
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
General
User Table
Radius
TACACS+
LDAP
NTP
Boot
Syslog/Trap Features
Config/Image Control
Mgmt
34 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
„
„
Switch Ports – configure each of the physical ports on the switch.
Port-Based Port Mirroring – configure port mirroring and mirror port.
Layer 2 – Configure Quality of Service (QoS) features for the switch.
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
802.1x
FDB
Virtual LANs
Spanning Tree Groups
MSTP/RSTP
Failover
Trunk Groups
Trunk Hash
LACP
Uplink Fast
„
Layer 3 – Configure Layer 3 features for the switch.
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
IP Interfaces
Network Routes
Static IPMC Routes
ARP
Network Filters
Route Maps
Border Gateway Protocol
Default Gateways
IGMP
OSPF Routing Protocol
Routing Information Protocol
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Domain Name System
Bootstrap Protocol Relay
General
„
„
QoS – Configure Quality of Service (QoS) features for the switch.
†
†
802.1p
DSCP
Access Control – Configure Access Control Lists to filter IP packets.
†
†
Access Control Lists
Access Control List Groups
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using SNMP
Alteon OS provides SNMP v1.0 and SNMP v3.0 support for access through any network man-
agement software, such as IBM Director or HP-OpenView.
SNMP v1.0
To access the SNMP agent on the GbESM, the read and write community strings on the SNMP
manager should be configured to match those on the switch. The default read community
string on the switch is publicand the default write community string is private.
The read and write community strings on the switch can be changed using the following com-
mands on the CLI:
>> /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm
and
>> /cfg/sys/ssnmp/wcomm
The SNMP manager should be able to reach the management interface or any one of the IP
interfaces on the switch.
For the SNMP manager to receive the traps sent out by the SNMP agent on the switch
(SNMPv1 only), configure the trap host on the switch with the following command:
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/trsrc <1-250>
SNMP v3.0
SNMPv3 is an enhanced version of the Simple Network Management Protocol, approved by
the Internet Engineering Steering Group in March, 2002. SNMP v3.0 contains additional secu-
rity and authentication features that provide data origin authentication, data integrity checks,
timeliness indicators and encryption to protect against threats such as masquerade, modifica-
tion of information, message stream modification and disclosure.
SNMPv3 ensures that the client can use SNMPv3 to query the MIBs, mainly for security.
To access the SNMP v3.0 menu, enter the following command in the CLI:
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3
36 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
For more information on SNMP MIBs and the commands used to configure SNMP on the
switch, see the Alteon OS Command Reference.
Default configuration
Alteon OS has two SNMP v3 users by default. Both of the following users have access to all
the MIBs supported by the switch:
1) username 1: adminmd5/password adminmd5. Authentication used is MD5.
2) username 2: adminsha/password adminsha. Authentication used is SHA.
To configure an SNMP user name, enter the following command from the CLI:
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 1
User Configuration:
Users can be configured to use the authentication/privacy options. The GbESM support two
authentication algorithms: MD5 and SHA, as specified in the following command:
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm <x>/auth md5|sha
1. To configure a user with name 'admin,' authentication type MD5, and authentication
password of 'admin,' privacy option DES with privacy password of 'admin,' use the fol-
lowing CLI commands.
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 5
>> SNMPv3 usmUser 5# name "admin"
>> SNMPv3 usmUser 5# auth md5
>> SNMPv3 usmUser 5# authpw admin
>> SNMPv3 usmUser 5# priv des
>> SNMPv3 usmUser 5# privpw admin
(Configure ‘admin’ user type)
2. Configure a user access group, along with the views the group may access. Use the access
table to configure the group’s access level.
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 5
>> SNMPv3 vacmAccess 5# name "admingrp"
>> SNMPv3 vacmAccess 5# level authPriv
>> SNMPv3 vacmAccess 5# rview "iso"
>> SNMPv3 vacmAccess 5# wview "iso"
>> SNMPv3 vacmAccess 5# nview "iso"
(Configure an access group)
Because the read view (rview), write view (wview), and notify view (nview) are all set to
“iso,” the user type has access to all private and public MIBs.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Assign the user to the user group. Use the group table to link the user to a particular
access group.
>> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 5
>> SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 5# uname admin
>> SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 5# gname admingrp
If you want to allow user access only to certain MIBs, see the 'View based Configuration' sec-
tion.
View based Configurations
CLI User equivalent
To configure an SNMP user equivalent to the CLI 'user,' use the following configuration:
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 4
name "usr"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 3
name "usrgrp"
(Configure the user)
(Configure access group 3)
rview "usr"
wview "usr"
nview "usr"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 4
uname usr
(Assign user to access group 3)
gname usrgrp
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 6
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 7
name "usr"
(Create views for user)
(Agent statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.3"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 8
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.2.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 9
name "usr"
(Agent information)
(L2 statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.2.3"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 10
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.3.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 11
name "usr"
(L2 information)
(L3 statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.3.3"
(L3 information)
38 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
CLI oper equivalent
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 5
name "oper"
(Configure the oper)
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 4
name "opergrp"
(Configure access group 4)
rview "oper"
wview "oper"
nview "oper"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 4
uname oper
(Assign oper to access group 4)
gname opergrp
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 20
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 21
name "usr"
(Create views for oper)
(Agent statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.3"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 22
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.2.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 23
name "usr"
(Agent information)
(L2 statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.2.3"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 24
name "usr"
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.3.2"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view 25
name "usr"
(L2 information)
(L3 statistics)
tree "1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.3.3"
(L3 information)
Configuring SNMP Trap Hosts
SNMPv1 trap host
1. Configure a user with no authentication and password.
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 10
name "v1trap"
(Configure user named “v1trap”)
2. Configure an access group and group table entries for the user. Use the following com-
mand to specify which traps can be received by the user
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access <x>/nview
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
In the example below the user will receive the traps sent by the switch.
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 10
name "v1trap"
(Define access group to view SNMPv1 traps)
model snmpv1
nview "iso"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 10
model snmpv1
(Assign user to the access group)
uname v1trap
gname v1trap
3. Configure an entry in the notify table.
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify 10
name v1trap
(Assign user to the notify table)
tag v1trap
4. Specify the IP address and other trap parameters in the targetAddr and targetParam
tables. Use the following command to specify the user name used with this targetParam
table:
c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam <x>/uname
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr 10
name v1trap
(Define an IP address to send traps)
addr 47.80.23.245
taglist v1trap
pname v1param
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam 10
name v1param
(Specify SNMPv1 traps to send)
mpmodel snmpv1
uname v1trap
model snmpv1
5. Use the community table to specify which community string is used in the trap.
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm 10
index v1trap
(Define the community string)
name public
uname v1trap
40 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
SNMPv2 trap host configuration
The SNMPv2 trap host configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 trap host configuration.
Wherever you specify the model, use snmpv2instead of snmpv1.
c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 10
name "v2trap"
(Configure user named “v2trap”)
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 10
name "v2trap"
(Define access group to view SNMPv2 traps)
model snmpv2
nview "iso"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 10
model snmpv2
(Assign user to the access group)
uname v2trap
gname v2trap
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify 10
name v2trap
(Assign user to the notify table)
tag v2trap
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr 10
name v2trap
(Define an IP address to send traps)
addr 47.81.25.66
taglist v2trap
pname v2param
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam 10
name v2param
(Specify SNMPv2 traps to send)
(Define the community string)
mpmodel snmpv2c
uname v2trap
model snmpv2
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm 10
index v2trap
name public
uname v2trap
SNMPv3 trap host configuration
To configure a user for SNMPv3 traps, you can choose to send the traps with both privacy and
authentication, with authentication only, or without privacy or authentication.
This is configured in the access table using the following commands:
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access <x>/level
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam <x>
Configure the user in the user table accordingly.
It is not necessary to configure the community table for SNMPv3 traps because the community
string is not used by SNMPv3.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The following example shows how to configure a SNMPv3 user v3trapwith authentication
only:
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm 11
(Configure user named “v3trap”)
name "v3trap"
auth md5
authpw v3trap
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access 11
name "v3trap"
(Define access group to view SNMPv3 traps)
level authNoPriv
nview "iso"
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group 11
uname v3trap
gname v3trap
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify 11
name v3trap
tag v3trap
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr 11
name v3trap
(Assign user to the access group)
(Assign user to the notify table)
(Define an IP address to send traps)
addr 47.81.25.66
taglist v3trap
pname v3param
/c/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam 11
name v3param
(Specify SNMPv3 traps to send)
(Set the authentication level)
uname v3trap
level authNoPriv
42 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Securing Access to the Switch
Secure switch management is needed for environments that perform significant management
functions across the Internet. The following are some of the functions for secured manage-
ment:
„
Authentication and authorization of remote administrators: see “RADIUS Authentication
and Authorization” on page 44
„
the switch: see “Secure Shell and Secure Copy” on page 55
The following sections are addressed in this section:
„
„
„
„
„
“TACACS+ Authentication” on page 48
“LDAP Authentication and Authorization” on page 53
“Secure Shell and Secure Copy” on page 55
“End User Access Control” on page 61
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
RADIUS Authentication and Authorization
Alteon OS supports the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service) method to
authenticate and authorize remote administrators for managing the switch. This method is
based on a client/server model. The Remote Access Server (RAS)—the switch—is a client to
the back-end database server. A remote user (the remote administrator) interacts only with the
RAS, not the back-end server and database.
RADIUS authentication consists of the following components:
„
„
„
A protocol with a frame format that utilizes UDP over IP (based on RFC 2138 and 2866)
A centralized server that stores all the user authorization information
A client, in this case, the switch
The GbE Switch Module—acting as the RADIUS client—communicates to the RADIUS
server to authenticate and authorize a remote administrator using the protocol definitions spec-
ified in RFC 2138 and 2866. Transactions between the client and the RADIUS server are
authenticated using a shared key that is not sent over the network. In addition, the remote
administrator passwords are sent encrypted between the RADIUS client (the switch) and the
back-end RADIUS server.
How RADIUS Authentication Works
1. Remote administrator connects to the switch and provides user name and password.
2. Using Authentication/Authorization protocol, the switch sends request to authentication
server.
3. Authentication server checks the request against the user ID database.
administrative access.
Configuring RADIUS on the Switch
Use the following procedure to configure Radius authentication on your GbE Switch Module.
For more information, see Appendix B, “RADIUS Server Configuration Notes.”
44 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
1. Turn RADIUS authentication on, then configure the Primary and Secondary RADIUS
servers.
>> Main# /cfg/sys/radius
>> RADIUS Server# on
Current status: OFF
(Select the RADIUS Server menu)
(Turn RADIUS on)
New status:
ON
>> RADIUS Server# prisrv 10.10.1.1
(Enter primary server IP)
Current primary RADIUS server:
0.0.0.0
New pending primary RADIUS server: 10.10.1.1
>> RADIUS Server# secsrv 10.10.1.2
Current secondary RADIUS server:
(Enter secondary server IP)
0.0.0.0
New pending secondary RADIUS server: 10.10.1.2
2. Configure the RADIUS secret.
>> RADIUS Server# secret
Enter new RADIUS secret: <1-32 character secret>
CAUTION—If you configure the RADIUS secret using any method other than through the con-
sole port or management module, the secret may be transmitted over the network as clear text.
!
3. If desired, you may change the default UDP port number used to listen to RADIUS.
The well-known port for RADIUS is 1645.
>> RADIUS Server# port
Current RADIUS port: 1645
Enter new RADIUS port [1500-3000]: <UDP port number>
4. Configure the number retry attempts for contacting the RADIUS server, and the timeout
period.
>> RADIUS Server# retries
Current RADIUS server retries: 3
Enter new RADIUS server retries [1-3]:
>> RADIUS Server# time
< server retries>
Current RADIUS server timeout: 3
Enter new RADIUS server timeout [1-10]: 10(Enter the timeout period in minutes)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
RADIUS Authentication Features in Alteon OS
Alteon OS supports the following RADIUS authentication features:
„
Supports RADIUS client on the switch, based on the protocol definitions in RFC 2138 and
RFC 2866.
„
„
Allows RADIUS secret password up to 32 bytes and less than 16 octets.
Supports secondary authentication server so that when the primary authentication server
is unreachable, the switch can send client authentication requests to the secondary authen-
tication server. Use the /cfg/sys/radius/curcommand to show the currently
active RADIUS authentication server.
„
Supports user-configurable RADIUS server retry and time-out values:
†
†
Time-out value = 1-10 seconds
Retries = 1-3
The switch will time out if it does not receive a response from the RADIUS server in 1-3
retries. The switch will also automatically retry connecting to the RADIUS server before it
declares the server down.
„
„
„
Supports user-configurable RADIUS application port.
The default is 1645/UDP-based on RFC 2138. Port 1812 is also supported.
Allows network administrator to define privileges for one or more specific users to access
the switch at the RADIUS user database.
SecurID is supported if the RADIUS server can do an ACE/Server client proxy. The pass-
word is the PIN number, plus the token code of the SecurID card.
46 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Switch User Accounts
The user accounts listed in Table 1-2 can be defined in the RADIUS server dictionary file.
Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account
Description and Tasks Performed
Password
User
The User has no direct responsibility for switch management.
He/she can view all switch status information and statistics but
cannot make any configuration changes to the switch.
user
Operator
The Operator manages all functions of the switch. The Operator oper
can reset ports or the entire switch.
Administrator
The super-user Administrator has complete access to all menus, admin
information, and configuration commands on the switch, includ-
ing the ability to change both the user and administrator pass-
words.
RADIUS Attributes for Alteon OS User Privileges
When the user logs in, the switch authenticates his/her level of access by sending the RADIUS
access request, that is, the client authentication request, to the RADIUS authentication server.
If the remote user is successfully authenticated by the authentication server, the switch will
verify the privileges of the remote user and authorize the appropriate access. The administrator
has an option to allow backdoor access via Telnet. The default is disablefor Telnet access.
Backdoor access is always enabled on the console port.
NOTE – To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM
Service and Support line.
All user privileges, other than those assigned to the Administrator, have to be defined in the
RADIUS dictionary. RADIUS attribute 6 which is built into all RADIUS servers defines the
administrator. The file name of the dictionary is RADIUS vendor-dependent. The following
RADIUS attributes are defined for Alteon OS user privileges levels:
Table 1-3 Alteon OS-proprietary Attributes for RADIUS
User Name/Access
User
User-Service-Type
Vendor-supplied
Vendor-supplied
Vendor-supplied
Value
255
Operator
Admin
252
250
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
TACACS+ Authentication
Alteon OS supports authentication and authorization with networks using the Cisco Systems
TACACS+ protocol. The GbE Switch Module functions as the Network Access Server (NAS)
by interacting with the remote client and initiating authentication and authorization sessions
with the TACACS+ access server. The remote user is defined as someone requiring manage-
ment access to the GbE Switch Module either through a data or management port.
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS:
„
TACACS+ uses TCP-based connection-oriented transport; whereas RADIUS is UDP-
based. TCP offers a connection-oriented transport, while UDP offers best-effort delivery.
RADIUS requires additional programmable variables such as re-transmit attempts and
time-outs to compensate for best-effort transport, but it lacks the level of built-in support
that a TCP transport offers.
„
„
TACACS+ offers full packet encryption whereas RADIUS offers password-only encryp-
tion in authentication requests.
TACACS+ separates authentication, authorization and accounting.
How TACACS+ Authentication Works
TACACS+ works much in the same way as RADIUS authentication as described on page 44.
1. Remote administrator connects to the switch and provides user name and password.
2. Using Authentication/Authorization protocol, the switch sends request to authentication
server.
3. Authentication server checks the request against the user ID database.
4. Using TACACS+ protocol, the authentication server instructs the switch to grant or deny
administrative access.
During a session, if additional authorization checking is needed, the switch checks with a
TACACS+ server to determine if the user is granted permission to use a particular command.
TACACS+ Authentication Features in Alteon OS
Authentication is the action of determining the identity of a user, and is generally done when
the user first attempts to log in to a device or gain access to its services. Alteon OS supports
ASCII inbound login to the device. PAP, CHAP and ARAP login methods, TACACS+ change
password requests, and one-time password authentication are not supported.
48 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Authorization
Authorization is the action of determining a user’s privileges on the device, and usually takes
place after authentication.
The default mapping between TACACS+ authorization levels and Alteon OS management
access levels is shown in Table 1-4. The authorization levels must be defined on the TACACS+
server.
Table 1-4 Default TACACS+ Authorization Levels
Alteon OS User Access Level
TACACS+ level
user
oper
admin
0
3
6
Alternate mapping between TACACS+ authorization levels and Alteon OS management
access levels is shown in Table 1-5. Use the command /cfg/sys/tacacs/cmap ena
to use the alternate TACACS+ authorization levels.
Table 1-5 Alternate TACACS+ Authorization Levels
Alteon OS User Access Level
TACACS+ level
0 - 1
user
oper
admin
6 - 8
14 - 15
If the remote user is successfully authenticated by the authentication server, the switch verifies
the privileges of the remote user and authorizes the appropriate access. The administrator has
an option to allow backdoor access via Telnet (/cfg/sys/tacacs/telnet). The default
value for Telnet access is disabled. The administrator also can enable secure backdoor
(/cfg/sys/tacacs/secbd), to allow access if both the primary and the secondary
TACACS+ servers fail to respond.
NOTE – To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM
Service and Support line.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Accounting
Accounting is the action of recording a user's activities on the device for the purposes of billing
and/or security. It follows the authentication and authorization actions. If the authentication
and authorization is not performed via TACACS+, there are no TACACS+ accounting mes-
sages sent out.
You can use TACACS+ to record and track software logins, configuration changes, and inter-
active commands.
The GbE Switch Module supports the following TACACS+ accounting attributes:
„
„
„
„
„
protocol (console/telnet/ssh/http)
start_time
stop_time
elapsed_time
disc-cause
NOTE – When using the Browser-Based Interface, the TACACS+ Accounting Stop records are
sent only if the Quit button on the browser is clicked.
Command Authorization and Logging
When TACACS+ Command Authorization is enabled (/cfg/sys/tacacs/cauth ena),
Alteon OS configuration commands are sent to the TACACS+ server for authorization. When
TACACS+ Command Logging is enabled (/cfg/sys/tacacs/clog ena), Alteon OS
configuration commands are logged on the TACACS+ server.
The following examples illustrate the format of Alteon OS commands sent to the TACACS+
server:
authorization request, cmd=cfgtree, cmd-arg=/cfg/l3/if
accounting request, cmd=/cfg/l3/if, cmd-arg=1
authorization request, cmd=cfgtree, cmd-arg=/cfg/l3/if/ena
accounting request, cmd=/cfg/l3/if/ena
authorization request, cmd=cfgtree, cmd-arg=/cfg/l3/if/addr
accounting request, cmd=/cfg/l3/if/addr, cmd-arg=10.90.90.91
authorization request, cmd=apply
accounting request, cmd=apply
50 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The following rules apply to TACACS+ command authorization and logging:
„
„
„
„
Only commands from a Console, Telnet, or SSH connection are sent for authorization and
logging. SNMP, BBI, or file-copy commands (for example, TFTP or sync) are not sent.
Only leaf-level commands are sent for authorization and logging. For example, /cfgis
not sent, but /cfg/l3/tacacs/cauthis sent.
The full path of each command is sent for authorization and logging. For example,
/cfg/sys/tacacs/cauth
Command arguments are not sent for authorization. For /cauth ena, only /cauthis
authorized. The command and its first argument are logged, if issued on the same line.
„
„
Only executed commands are logged.
Invalid commands are checked by Alteon OS, and are not sent for authorization or log-
ging.
„
„
Authorization is performed on each leaf-level command separately. If the user issues mul-
tiple commands at once, each command is sent separately as a full path.
Only the following global commands are sent for authorization and logging:
apply
diff
ping
revert
save
telnet
traceroute
TACACS+ Password Change
Alteon OS supports TACACS+ password change. When enabled, users can change
their passwords after successful TACACS+ authorization. Use the command
/cfg/sys/tacacs/passchto enable or disable this feature.
Use the following commands to change the password for the primary and secondary
TACACS+ servers:
>> # /cfg/sys/tacacs/chpass_p
(Change primary TACACS+ password)
(Change secondary TACACS+ password)
>> # /cfg/sys/tacacs/chpass_s
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring TACACS+ Authentication on the Switch
1. Turn TACACS+ authentication on, then configure the Primary and Secondary
TACACS+ servers.
>> Main# /cfg/sys/tacacs+
>> TACACS+ Server# on
Current status: OFF
(Select the TACACS+ Server menu)
(Turn TACACS+ on)
New status:
ON
>> TACACS+ Server# prisrv 10.10.1.1
(Enter primary server IP)
Current primary TACACS+ server:
0.0.0.0
New pending primary TACACS+ server: 10.10.1.1
>> TACACS+ Server# secsrv 10.10.1.2
Current secondary TACACS+ server:
(Enter secondary server IP)
0.0.0.0
New pending secondary TACACS+ server: 10.10.1.2
2. Configure the TACACS+ secret and second secret.
>> TACACS+ Server# secret
Enter new TACACS+ secret: <1-32 character secret>
>> TACACS+ Server# secret2
Enter new TACACS+ second secret: <1-32 character secret>
CAUTION—If you configure the TACACS+ secret using any method other than a direct console
connection or through a secure management module connection, the secret may be transmitted
over the network as clear text.
!
3. If desired, you may change the default TCP port number used to listen to TACACS+.
The well-known port for TACACS+ is 49.
>> TACACS+ Server# port
Current TACACS+ port: 49
Enter new TACACS+ port [1-65000]: <port number>
4. Configure the number of retry attempts, and the timeout period.
>> TACACS+ Server# retries
Current TACACS+ server retries: 3
Enter new TACACS+ server retries [1-3]:
>> TACACS+ Server# time
< server retries>
Current TACACS+ server timeout: 5
Enter new TACACS+ server timeout [4-15]: 10(Enter the timeout period in minutes)
5. Apply and save the configuration.
52 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
LDAP Authentication and Authorization
Alteon OS supports the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) method to authenti-
cate and authorize remote administrators to manage the switch. LDAP is based on a client/
server model. The switch acts as a client to the LDAP server. A remote user (the remote admin-
istrator) interacts only with the switch, not the back-end server and database.
LDAP authentication consists of the following components:
„
„
„
A protocol with a frame format that utilizes TCP over IP
A centralized server that stores all the user authorization information
A client, in this case, the switch
Each entry in the LDAP server is referenced by its Distinguished Name (DN). The DN consists
of the user-account name concatenated with the LDAP domain name. If the user-account name
is John, the following is an example DN:
uid=John,ou=people,dc=domain,dc=com
Configuring the LDAP Server
GbESM user groups and user accounts must reside within the same domain. On the LDAP
server, configure the domain to include GbESM user groups and user accounts, as follows:
„
User Accounts:
Use the uid attribute to define each individual user account.
„
User Groups:
Use the members attribute in the groupOfNames object class to create the user groups. The
first word of the common name for each user group must be equal to the user group names
defined in the GbESM, as follows:
†
†
†
admin
oper
user
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring LDAP Authentication on the Switch
1. Turn LDAP authentication on, then configure the Primary and Secondary LDAP servers.
>> Main# /cfg/sys/ldap
>> LDAP Server# on
Current status: OFF
(Select the LDAP Server menu)
(Turn LDAP on)
New status:
ON
>> LDAP Server# prisrv 10.10.1.1
Current primary LDAP server:
New pending primary LDAP server: 10.10.1.1
>> LDAP Server# secsrv 10.10.1.2
(Enter primary server IP)
(Enter secondary server IP)
0.0.0.0
Current secondary LDAP server:
0.0.0.0
New pending secondary LDAP server: 10.10.1.2
2. Configure the domain name.
>> LDAP Server# domain
Current LDAP domain name:
Enter new LDAP domain name:
ou-people,dc=domain,dc=com
ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com
3. If desired, you may change the default TCP port number used to listen to LDAP.
The well-known port for LDAP is 389.
>> LDAP Server# port
Current LDAP port: 389
Enter new LDAP port [1-65000]: <port number>
4. Configure the number of retry attempts for contacting the LDAP server, and the timeout
period.
>> LDAP Server# retries
Current LDAP server retries: 3
Enter new LDAP server retries [1-3]:
>> LDAP Server# timeout
< server retries>
Current LDAP server timeout: 5
Enter new LDAP server timeout [4-15]: 10 (Enter the timeout period in minutes)
5. Apply and save the configuration.
54 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Secure Shell and Secure Copy
Secure Shell (SSH) and Secure Copy (SCP) use secure tunnels to encrypt and secure messages
between a remote administrator and the switch. Telnet does not provide this level of security.
The Telnet method of managing a GbE Switch Module does not provide a secure connection.
SSH is a protocol that enables remote administrators to log securely into the GbE Switch Mod-
ule over a network to execute management commands.
SCP is typically used to copy files securely from one machine to another. SCP uses SSH for
encryption of data on the network. On a GbE Switch Module, SCP is used to download and
upload the switch configuration via secure channels.
The benefits of using SSH and SCP are listed below:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Authentication of remote administrators
Identifying the administrator using Name/Password
Authorization of remote administrators
Determining the permitted actions and customizing service for individual administrators
Encryption of management messages
Encrypting messages between the remote administrator and switch
Secure copy support
The Alteon OS implementation of SSH supports both versions 1.5 and 2.0. and supports SSH
clients version 1.5 - 2.x. The following SSH clients have been tested
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware)
SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 for Windows NT (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.)
F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows)
Putty SSH
Cygwin OpenSSH
Mac X OpenSSH
Solaris 8 OpenSSH
AxeSSH SSHPro
SSH Communications Vandyke SSH A
F-Secure
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring SSH/SCP features on the switch
Before you can use SSH commands, use the following commands to turn on SSH/SCP. SSH
and SCP are disabled by default.
To enable or disable the SSH feature:
Begin a Telnet session from the console port and enter the following commands:
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/on
Current status: OFF
New status: ON
(Turn SSH on)
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/off
Current status: ON
New status: OFF
(Turn SSH off)
To enable or disable SCP apply and save:
Enter the following commands from the switch CLI to enable the SCP putcfg_applyand
putcfg_apply_savecommands:
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/ena
SSHD# apply
(Enable SCP apply and save)
(Apply the changes to start generating RSA
host and server keys)
RSA host key generation starts
.............................................................
......................................................
RSA host key generation completes (lasts 212549 ms)
RSA host key is being saved to Flash ROM, please don't reboot
the box immediately.
RSA server key generation starts
............................................................
RSA server key generation completes (lasts 75503 ms)
RSA server key is being saved to Flash ROM, please don't reboot
the box immediately.
------------------------------------------------------------------
Apply complete; don't forget to "save" updated configuration.
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/dis
(Disable SSH/SCP apply and save)
56 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring the SCP Administrator Password
To configure the scpadm(SCP Administrator) password, first connect to the switch via the
serial console port. For security reasons, the scpadm password may only be configured when
connected through the console port.
To configure the password, enter the following command via the CLI. At factory default set-
tings, the current SCP administrator password is admin.
>> /cfg/sys/sshd/scpadm
Changing SCP-only Administrator password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password: <password>
Enter new SCP-only administrator password: <new password>
Re-enter new SCP-only administrator password: <new password>
New SCP-only administrator password accepted.
Using SSH and SCP Client Commands
This section shows the format for using some client commands. The examples below use
205.178.15.157 as the IP address of a sample switch.
To log in to the switch:
Syntax:
ssh <switch IP address> or ssh -l <login-name> <switch IP address>
Example:
>> # ssh 205.178.15.157
>> # ssh -l <login-name> 205.178.15.157
(Login to the switch)
To download the switch configuration using SCP:
Syntax:
scp <username>@<switch IP address>:getcfg <local filename>
Example:
>> # scp [email protected]:getcfg ad4.cfg
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
To upload the configuration to the switch:
Syntax:
scp <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putcfg
Example:
>> # scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg
To apply and save the configuration
The applyand savecommands are still needed after the last command, or use the following
commands:
>> # scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg_apply
>> # scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg_apply_save
„
The diffcommand is automatically executed at the end of putcfgto notify the remote
client of the difference between the new and the current configurations.
„ putcfg_applyruns the apply commandafter the putcfgis done.
„ putcfg_apply_savesaves the new configuration to the flash after putcfg_apply
is done.
„
The putcfg_applyand putcfg_apply_savecommands are provided because
extra applyand savecommands are usually required after a putcfg; however, an
SCP session is not in an interactive mode at all.
SSH and SCP Encryption of Management Messages
The following encryption and authentication methods are supported for SSH and SCP:
Server Host Authentication:
Client RSA authenticates the switch at the beginning of
every connection
Key Exchange:
Encryption:
RSA
3DES-CBC, DES
User Authentication:
Local password authentication, RADIUS, SecurID
(via RADIUS, TACACS+, for SSH only—does not apply
to SCP)
58 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Generating RSA Host and Server Keys for SSH Access
To support the SSH server feature, two sets of RSA keys (host and server keys) are required.
The host key is 1024 bits and is used to identify the GbE Switch Module. The server key is 768
bits and is used to make it impossible to decipher a captured session by breaking into the GbE
Switch Module at a later time.
When the SSH server is first enabled and applied, the switch automatically generates the RSA
host and server keys and is stored in the FLASH memory.
NOTE – To configure RSA host and server keys, first connect to the GbE Switch Module
through the console port (commands are not available via external Telnet connection), and
enter the following commands to generate them manually.
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/hkeygen
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/skeygen
(Generates the host key)
(Generates the server key)
These two commands take effect immediately without the need of an applycommand.
When the switch reboots, it will retrieve the host and server keys from the FLASH memory. If
these two keys are not available in the flash and if the SSH server feature is enabled, the switch
automatically generates them during the system reboot. This process may take several minutes
to complete.
The switch can also automatically regenerate the RSA server key. To set the interval of RSA
server key autogeneration, use this command:
>> # /cfg/sys/sshd/intrval <number of hours (0-24)>
A value of 0 (zero) denotes that RSA server key autogeneration is disabled. When greater than
0, the switch will autogenerate the RSA server key every specified interval; however, RSA
server key generation is skipped if the switch is busy doing other key or cipher generation
when the timer expires.
NOTE – The switch will perform only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, an
SSH/SCP client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key generation at that
time, or if another client has logged in immediately prior. Also, key generation will fail if an
SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
SSH/SCP Integration with Radius Authentication
SSH/SCP is integrated with RADIUS authentication. After the RADIUS server is enabled on
the switch, all subsequent SSH authentication requests will be redirected to the specified
RADIUS servers for authentication. The redirection is transparent to the SSH clients.
SSH/SCP Integration with TACACS+ Authentication
SSH/SCP is integrated with TACACS+ authentication. After the TACACS+ server is enabled
on the switch, all subsequent SSH authentication requests will be redirected to the specified
TACACS+ servers for authentication. The redirection is transparent to the SSH clients.
SecurID Support
SSH/SCP can also work with SecurID, a token card-based authentication method. The use of
SecurID requires the interactive mode during login, which is not provided by the SSH connec-
tion.
NOTE – There is no SNMP or Browser-Based Interface (BBI) support for SecurID because the
SecurID server, ACE, is a one-time password authentication and requires an interactive ses-
sion.
Using SecurID with SSH
Using SecurID with SSH involves the following tasks.
„
„
To log in using SSH, use a special username, “ace,” to bypass the SSH authentication.
After an SSH connection is established, you are prompted to enter the username and pass-
word (the SecurID authentication is being performed now).
„
Provide your username and the token in your SecurID card as a regular Telnet user.
Using SecurID with SCP
Using SecurID with SCP can be accomplished in two ways:
„
Using a RADIUS server to store an administrator password.
You can configure a regular administrator with a fixed password in the RADIUS server if
it can be supported. A regular administrator with a fixed password in the RADIUS server
can perform both SSH and SCP with no additional authentication required.
„
Using an SCP-only administrator password.
Use the command, /cfg/sys/sshd/scpadmto bypass the checking of SecurID.
60 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
An SCP-only administrator’s password is typically used when SecurID is used. For exam-
ple, it can be used in an automation program (in which the tokens of SecurID are not avail-
able) to back up (download) the switch configurations each day.
NOTE – The SCP-only administrator’s password must be different from the regular administra-
tor’s password. If the two passwords are the same, the administrator using that password will
not be allowed to log in as an SSH user because the switch will recognize him as the SCP-only
administrator. The switch will only allow the administrator access to SCP commands.
End User Access Control
Alteon OS allows an administrator to define end user accounts that permit end users to perform
operation tasks via the switch CLI commands. Once end user accounts are configured and
enabled, the switch requires username/password authentication.
For example, an administrator can assign a user, who can then log into the switch and perform
operational commands (effective only until the next switch reboot).
Considerations for Configuring End User Accounts
„
A maximum of 10 user IDs are supported on the switch.
„
Alteon OS supports end user support for Console, Telnet, BBI, and SSHv1/v2 access to
the switch. As a result, only very limited access will be granted to the Primary Administra-
tor under the BBI/SSH1 mode of access.
„
„
If RADIUS authentication is used, the user password on the Radius server will override
the user password on the GbE Switch Module. Also note that the password change com-
mand on the switch only modifies the use switch password and has no effect on the user
password on the Radius server. Radius authentication and user password cannot be used
concurrently to access the switch.
Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length for TACACS, RADIUS, Telnet, SSH, Con-
sole, and Web access.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Strong Passwords
The administrator can require use of Strong Passwords for users to access the GbESM. Strong
Passwords enhance security because they make password guessing more difficult.
The following rules apply when Strong Passwords are enabled:
„
„
Each passwords must be 8 to 14 characters
Within the first 8 characters, the password:
†
†
†
must have at least one number or one symbol
must have both upper and lower case letters
cannot be the same as any four previously used passwords
The following are examples of strong passwords:
„
„
„
1234AbcXyz
Super+User
Exo1cet2
The administrator can choose the number of days allowed before each password expires. When
a strong password expires, the user is allowed to log in one last time (last time) to change the
password. A warning provides advance notice for users to change the password.
Use the Strong Password menu to configure Strong Passwords.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/user/strongpw
User Access Control Menu
The end user access control menu is located in the System access menu.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/user
Setting up User IDs
Up to 10 user IDs can be configured in the User ID menu.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/user/uid 1
62 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Defining User Names and Passwords
Use the User ID menu to define user names and passwords.
>> User ID 1 # name user1
(Assign name to user ID 1)
Current user name:
New user name:
user1
>> User ID 1 # passwd
(Assign password to user ID 1)
Changing user password; validation required:
Enter current admin password: <current administrator password>
Enter new user1 password: <new user password>
Re-enter new user1 password: <new user password>
New user1 password accepted.
Defining a User’s Access Level
The end user is by default assigned to the user access level (also known as class of service, or
CoS). CoS for all user accounts have global access to all resources except for User CoS, which
has access to view only resources that the user owns. For more information, see Table 1-2
“User Access Levels” on page 47.
To change the user’s level, enter the class of service coscommand, and select one of the fol-
lowing options:
>> User ID 1 # cos <user|oper|admin>
Validating a User’s Configuration
User ID 2 # cur
name jane
, dis, cos user
, password valid, offline
Enabling or Disabling a User
An end user account must be enabled before the switch recognizes and permits login under the
account. Once enabled, the switch requires any user to enter both username and password.
>> # /cfg/sys/access/user/uid<#>/ena
>> # /cfg/sys/access/user/uid<#>/dis
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Listing Current Users
The curcommand displays defined user accounts and whether or not each user is currently
logged into the switch.
# /cfg/sys/access/user/cur
Usernames:
user
oper
admin
- Enabled - offline
- Disabled - offline
- Always Enabled - online 1 session
Current User ID table:
1: name jane
2: name john
, ena, cos user
, ena, cos user
, password valid, online
, password valid, online
Logging into an End User Account
Once an end user account is configured and enabled, the user can login to the switch username/
password combination. The level of switch access is determined by the CoS established for the
end user account.
64 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch „ 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
66 „ Chapter 1: Accessing the Switch
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2
Port-based Network Access Control
Port-Based Network Access control provides a means of authenticating and authorizing
The following topics are discussed in this section:
„
„
„
„
„
“Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN” on page 68
“802.1x Authentication Process” on page 69
“802.1x Port States” on page 71
“Supported RADIUS Attributes” on page 72
“Configuration Guidelines” on page 73
42C4911, January 2007
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN
Alteon OS can provide user-level security for its ports using the IEEE 802.1x protocol, which
is a more secure alternative to other methods of port-based network access control. Any device
attached to an 802.1x-enabled port that fails authentication is prevented access to the network
and denied services offered through that port.
The 802.1x standard describes port-based network access control using Extensible Authentica-
tion Protocol over LAN (EAPoL). EAPoL provides a means of authenticating and authorizing
devices attached to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection characteristics and of pre-
venting access to that port in cases of authentication and authorization failures.
EAPoL is a client-server protocol that has the following components:
„
„
Supplicant or Client
The Supplicant is a device that requests network access and provides the required creden-
tials (user name and password) to the Authenticator and the Authenticator Server.
Authenticator
The Authenticator enforces authentication and controls access to the network. The
Authenticator grants network access based on the information provided by the Supplicant
and the response from the Authentication Server. The Authenticator acts as an intermedi-
ary between the Supplicant and the Authentication Server: requesting identity information
from the client, forwarding that information to the Authentication Server for validation,
relaying the server’s responses to the client, and authorizing network access based on the
results of the authentication exchange. The GbESM acts as an Authenticator.
„
Authentication Server,
The Authentication Server validates the credentials provided by the Supplicant to deter-
mine if the Authenticator should grant access to the network. The Authentication Server
may be co-located with the Authenticator. The GbESM relies on external RADIUS servers
for authentication.
Upon a successful authentication of the client by the server, the 802.1x-controlled port transi-
tions from unauthorized to authorized state, and the client is allowed full access to services
through the port. When the client sends an EAP-Logoff message to the authenticator, the port
will transition from authorized to unauthorized state.
68 „ Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
802.1x Authentication Process
The clients and authenticators communicate using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP),
which was originally designed to run over PPP, and for which the IEEE 802.1x Standard has
defined an encapsulation method over Ethernet frames, called EAP over LAN (EAPOL).
Figure 2-1 shows a typical message exchange initiated by the client.
RADIUS
Server
802.1x Client
EAPOL
GbESM
(Authenticator)
(RADIUS Client)
RADIUS-EAP
UDP/IP
Ethernet
Port Unauthorized
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request (Credentials)
EAP-Response (Credentials)
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Challenge
EAP-Request (Credentials)
EAP-Response (Credentials)
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Accept
EAP-Success
Port Authorized
Figure 2-1 Authenticating a Port Using EAPoL
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control „ 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
EAPoL Message Exchange
During authentication, EAPOL messages are exchanged between the client and the GbESM
authenticator, while RADIUS-EAP messages are exchanged between the GbESM authentica-
tor and the RADIUS server.
Authentication is initiated by one of the following methods:
„
„
GbESM authenticator sends an EAP-Request/Identity packet to the client
Client sends an EAPOL-Start frame to the GbESM authenticator, which responds with an
EAP-Request/Identity frame.
The client confirms its identity by sending an EAP-Response/Identity frame to the GbESM
authenticator, which forwards the frame encapsulated in a RADIUS packet to the server.
The RADIUS authentication server chooses an EAP-supported authentication algorithm to
verify the client’s identity, and sends an EAP-Request packet to the client via the GbESM
authenticator. The client then replies to the RADIUS server with an EAP-Response containing
its credentials.
Upon a successful authentication of the client by the server, the 802.1x-controlled port transi-
tions from unauthorized to authorized state, and the client is allowed full access to services
through the controlled port. When the client later sends an EAPOL-Logoff message to the
GbESM authenticator, the port transitions from authorized to unauthorized state.
If a client that does not support 802.1x connects to an 802.1x-controlled port, the GbESM
authenticator requests the client's identity when it detects a change in the operational state of
the port. The client does not respond to the request, and the port remains in the unauthorized
state.
NOTE – When an 802.1x-enabled client connects to a port that is not 802.1x-controlled, the cli-
ent initiates the authentication process by sending an EAPOL-Start frame. When no response is
received, the client retransmits the request for a fixed number of times. If no response is
received, the client assumes the port is in authorized state, and begins sending frames, even if
the port is unauthorized.
70 „ Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
802.1x Port States
The state of the port determines whether the client is granted access to the network, as follows:
„
„
Unauthorized
While in this state the port discards all ingress and egress traffic except EAP packets.
Authorized
When the client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state
allowing all traffic to and from the client to flow normally.
„
„
Force Unauthorized
You can configure this state that denies all access to the port.
Force Authorized
You can configure this state that allows full access to the port.
Use the 802.1x Global Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x/global) to
configure 802.1x authentication for all ports in the switch. Use the 802.1x Port Menu
(/cfg/l2/8021x/port x) to configure a single port.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control „ 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Supported RADIUS Attributes
The Alteon 802.1x Authenticator relies on external RADIUS servers for authentication
with EAP. Table 2 lists the RADIUS attributes that are supported as part of
RADIUS-EAP authentication based on the guidelines specified in Annex D of the 802.1x
standard and RFC 3580.
Table 2 Support for RADIUS Attributes
#
Attribute
Attribute Value
A-R A-A A-C A-R
1
User-Name
The value of the Type-Data field from the supplicant’s
EAP-Response/Identity message. If the Identity is
unknown (i.e. Type-Data field is zero bytes in length), this
attribute will have the same value as the Calling-Station-
Id.
1
0-1
0
0
4
5
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
IP address of the authenticator used for Radius commu-
nication.
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port number of the authenticator port to which the suppli-
cant is attached.
24 State
Server-specific value. This is sent unmodified back to the 0-1
server in an Access-Request that is in response to an
Access-Challenge.
0-1 0-1
30 Called-Station-ID
31 Calling-Station-ID
79 EAP-Message
The MAC address of the authenticator encoded as an
ASCII string in canonical format, e.g. 000D5622E3 9F.
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
The MAC address of the supplicant encoded as an ASCII
string in canonical format, e.g. 00034B436206.
1
Encapsulated EAP packets from the supplicant to the
authentication server (Radius) and vice-versa. The
authenticator relays the decoded packet to both devices.
1+
1+
1+
1+
80 Message-Authentica- Always present whenever an EAP-Message attribute is
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
tor
also included. Used to integrity-protect a packet.
87 NAS-Port-ID
Name assigned to the authenticator port, e.g.
Server1_Port3
Legend:
RADIUS Packet Types: A-R (Access-Request), A-A (Access-Accept), A-C (Access-Challenge), A-R (Access-Reject)
RADIUS Attribute Support:
0
This attribute MUST NOT be present in a packet.
0+ Zero or more instances of this attribute MAY be present in a packet.
0-1 Zero or one instance of this attribute MAY be present in a packet.
1
Exactly one instance of this attribute MUST be present in a packet.
1+ One or more of these attributes MUST be present.
72 „ Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuration Guidelines
When configuring EAPoL, consider the following guidelines:
„
„
The 802.1x port-based authentication is currently supported only in point-to-point config-
urations, that is, with a single supplicant connected to an 802.1x-enabled switch port.
When 802.1x is enabled, a port has to be in the authorized state before any other Layer 2
feature can be operationally enabled. For example, the STG state of a port is operationally
disabled while the port is in the unauthorized state.
„
The 802.1x supplicant capability is not supported. Therefore, none of its ports can suc-
cessfully connect to an 802.1x-enabled port of another device, such as another switch, that
acts as an authenticator, unless access control on the remote port is disabled or is config-
ured in forced-authorized mode. For example, if a GbESM is connected to another
GbESM, and if 802.1x is enabled on both switches, the two connected ports must be con-
figured in force-authorized mode.
„
The 802.1x standard has optional provisions for supporting dynamic virtual LAN
assignment via RADIUS tunnelling attributes, for example, Tunnel-Type (=VLAN),
Tunnel-Medium-Type (=802), and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID (=VLAN id).
These attributes are not supported and might affect 802.1x operations. Other unsupported
attributes include Service-Type, Session-Timeout, and Termination-Action.
„
„
RADIUS accounting service for 802.1x-authenticated devices or users is not supported.
Configuration changes performed using SNMP and the standard 802.1x MIB will take
effect immediately.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control „ 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
74 „ Chapter 2: Port-based Network Access Control
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3
VLANs
This chapter describes network design and topology considerations for using Virtual Local Area
ageable broadcast domains, to create logical segmentation of workgroups, and to enforce security
policies among logical segments. The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
„
„
„
“VLANs and Port VLAN ID Numbers” on page 77
“VLAN Tagging” on page 80
“VLAN Topologies and Design Considerations” on page 84
This section discusses how you can logically connect users and segments to a host that
supports many logical segments or subnets by using the flexibility of the multiple VLAN
system.
„
“Protocol-based VLANs” on page 87
NOTE – Basic VLANs can be configured during initial switch configuration (see “Using the
Setup Utility” in the Alteon OS Command Reference). More comprehensive VLAN configura-
tion can be done from the Command Line Interface (see “VLAN Configuration” as well as
“Port Configuration” in the Alteon OS Command Reference).
42C4911, January 2007
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Overview
Setting up virtual LANs (VLANs) is a way to segment networks to increase network flexibility
without changing the physical network topology. With network segmentation, each switch port
connects to a segment that is a single broadcast domain. When a switch port is configured to be
a member of a VLAN, it is added to a group of ports (workgroup) that belong to one broadcast
domain.
Ports are grouped into broadcast domains by assigning them to the same VLAN. Frames
received in one VLAN can only be forwarded within that VLAN, and multicast, broadcast,
and unknown unicast frames are flooded only to ports in the same VLAN. The GbE Switch
Module supports jumbo frames, up to 12288 bytes.
76 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
VLANs and Port VLAN ID Numbers
VLAN Numbers
Alteon OS supports up to 1024 VLANs per switch. Even though the maximum number
of VLANs supported at any given time is 1024, each can be identified with any number
between 1 and 4095. VLAN 1 is the default VLAN for the external ports and the internal blade
ports. VLAN 4095 is reserved for use by the internal management ports (MGT1 and MGT2).
VLAN 4094 is reserved for use by the external management port (EXT7).
Viewing VLANs
„
VLAN information menu:
VLAN
Name
Status
Ports
---- ------------------------ ------ -------------------------
1
2
Default VLAN
VLAN 2
ena
dis
ena
ena
INT1-INT14 EXT1-EXT6
empty
EXT7
MGT1-MGT2
4094 EXT-Mgmt VLAN
4095 Mgmt VLAN
PVLAN Protocol FrameType EtherType Priority Status
Ports
----- -------- -------------------- -------- ------ -----------
1
2
empty
0000
0
dis
empty
PVLAN
PVLAN-Tagged Ports
----- ---------------------------
none none
NOTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
PVID Numbers
Each port in the switch has a configurable default VLAN number, known as its PVID. By
default, the PVID for all non-management ports is set to 1, which correlates to the default
VLAN ID. The PVID for each port can be configured to any VLAN number between 1 and
4094.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Viewing and Configuring PVIDs
Use the following CLI commands to view PVIDs:
Port information:
Alias Port Tag Fast PVID
„
NAME
VLAN(s)
----- ---- --- ---- ---- -------------- ----------------------------
---
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
1 n n
2 n n
3 n n
4 n n
5 n n
6 n n
7 n n
8 n n
9 n n
1 INT1
1 INT2
1 INT3
1 INT4
1 INT5
1 INT6
1 INT7
1 INT8
1 INT9
1 INT10
1 INT11
1 INT12
1 INT13
1 INT14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
INT10 10 n n
INT11 11 n n
INT12 12 n n
INT13 13 n n
INT14 14 n n
MGT1 15 n n 4095 MGT1
MGT2 16 n n 4095 MGT2
4095
4095
EXT1 17 n n
EXT2 18 n n
EXT3 19 n n
EXT4 20 n n
EXT5 21 n n
EXT6 22 n n
1 EXT1
1 EXT2
1 EXT3
1 EXT4
1 EXT5
1 EXT6
1
1
1
1
1
1
EXT7 23 n n 4094 EXT7
4094
* = PVID is tagged.
NOTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
„
Port Configuration:
>> /cfg/port INT7/pvid 7
Current port VLAN ID:
1
New pending port VLAN ID: 7
>> Port INT7#
78 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Each port on the switch can belong to one or more VLANs, and each VLAN can have any
number of switch ports in its membership. Any port that belongs to multiple VLANs, however,
must have VLAN tagging enabled (see “VLAN Tagging” on page 80).
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
VLAN Tagging
Alteon OS software supports 802.1Q VLAN tagging, providing standards-based VLAN sup-
port for Ethernet systems.
Tagging places the VLAN identifier in the frame header of a packet, allowing each port to
belong to multiple VLANs. When you add a port to multiple VLANs, you also must enable
tagging on that port.
Since tagging fundamentally changes the format of frames transmitted on a tagged port, you
must carefully plan network designs to prevent tagged frames from being transmitted to
devices that do not support 802.1Q VLAN tags, or devices where tagging is not enabled.
Important terms used with the 802.1Q tagging feature are:
„
„
VLAN identifier (VID)—the 12-bit portion of the VLAN tag in the frame header that
identifies an explicit VLAN.
Port VLAN identifier (PVID)—a classification mechanism that associates a port with a
specific VLAN. For example, a port with a PVID of 3 (PVID =3) assigns all untagged
frames received on this port to VLAN 3. Any untagged frames received by the switch are
classified with the PVID of the receiving port.
„
Tagged frame—a frame that carries VLAN tagging information in the header. This VLAN
tagging information is a 32-bit field (VLAN tag) in the frame header that identifies the
frame as belonging to a specific VLAN. Untagged frames are marked (tagged) with this
classification as they leave the switch through a port that is configured as a tagged port.
„
„
Untagged frame— a frame that does not carry any VLAN tagging information in the
frame header.
Untagged member—a port that has been configured as an untagged member of a specific
VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through an untagged member port, the
frame header remains unchanged. When a tagged frame exits the switch through an
untagged member port, the tag is stripped and the tagged frame is changed to an untagged
frame.
„
Tagged member—a port that has been configured as a tagged member of a specific
VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through a tagged member port, the
frame header is modified to include the 32-bit tag associated with the PVID. When a
tagged frame exits the switch through a tagged member port, the frame header remains
unchanged (original VID remains).
NOTE – If a 802.1Q tagged frame is received by a port that has VLAN-tagging disabled, then
the frame is dropped at the ingress port.
80 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 3-1 Default VLAN settings
802.1Q Switch
VLAN 1
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
...
Port 7
PVID = 1
DA
SA
CRC
Data
Incoming
untagged
packet
Outgoing
untagged packet
(unchanged)
Data
CRC
SA
DA
Key
By default:
All ports are assigned PVID = 1
All external ports are untagged members of VLAN 1
All internal server ports are untagged members of VLAN 1
physical port configuration of your switch model.
When a VLAN is configured, ports are added as members of the VLAN, and the ports are
defined as either tagged or untagged (see Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-5).
is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2, and port 7 is configured as an untagged member
of VLAN 2.
The default configuration settings for GbE Switch Modules have all ports set as untagged
members of VLAN 1 with all ports configured as PVID = 1. In the default configuration exam-
ple shown in Figure 3-1 on page 81, all incoming packets are assigned to VLAN 1 by the
default port VLAN identifier (PVID =1).
Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-5 illustrate generic examples of VLAN tagging.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
NOTE – The port assignments in the following figures are not meant to match the
GbE Switch Module.
Figure 3-2 Port-based VLAN assignment
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
PVID = 2
Untagged packet
802.1Q Switch
CRC Data SA DA
Before
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
BS45011A
As shown in Figure 3-3, the untagged packet is marked (tagged) as it leaves the switch through
port 5, which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2. The untagged packet remains
unchanged as it leaves the switch through port 7, which is configured as an untagged member
of VLAN 2.
Figure 3-3 802.1Q tagging (after port-based VLAN assignment)
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
PVID = 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
802.1Q Switch
CRC* Data Tag SA DA
(*Recalculated)
Port 6
Port 7
CRC
Data
Port 8
8100 Priority CFI VID = 2
Untagged memeber
of VLAN 2
16 bits 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits
After
SA
DA
Outgoing
untagged packet
(unchanged)
Key
Priority - User_priority
CFI
VID
- Canonical format indicator
- VLAN identifier
BS45012A
82 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
In Figure 3-4, tagged incoming packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 because of the tag
assignment in the packet. Port 5 is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2, and port 7 is
configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Figure 3-4 802.1Q tag assignment
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
PVID = 2
Tagged packet
802.1Q Switch
CRC Data Tag SA DA
Before
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
BS45013A
As shown in Figure 3-5, the tagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through
port 5, which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2. However, the tagged packet is
stripped (untagged) as it leaves the switch through port 7, which is configured as an untagged
member of VLAN 2.
Figure 3-5 802.1Q tagging (after 802.1Q tag assignment)
PVID = 2
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
802.1Q Switch
CRC Data Tag SA DA
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
8100 Priority CFI VID = 2
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
(*Recalculated)
CRC*
Data
16 bits 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits
After
Outgoing
untagged packet
changed
SA
DA
Key
Priority - User_priority
(tag removed)
CFI
VID
- Canonical format indicator
- VLAN identifier
BS45014A
NOTE – Set the configuration to factory default (/boot/conf factory) to reset all non-
management ports to VLAN 1.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
VLAN Topologies and Design Considerations
„
„
„
„
„
By default, the Alteon OS software is configured so that tagging is disabled on all external
ports and all internal ports.
By default, the Alteon OS software is configured so that all internal ports are members of
VLAN 1.
By default, the Alteon OS software is configured so that the management ports (MGT1
and MGT2) are members of the management VLAN 4095.
By default, the Alteon OS software is configured so that the external management port
(EXT7) is a member of VLAN 4094.
If configuring Spanning Tree Groups (STG), note that Spanning Tree Groups 2-128 may
contain only one VLAN.
VLAN configuration rules
VLANs operate according to specific configuration rules. When creating VLANs, consider the
following rules that determine how the configured VLAN reacts in any network topology:
„
„
All ports involved in trunking and port mirroring must have the same VLAN configura-
tion. If a port is on a trunk with a mirroring port, the VLAN configuration cannot be
changed. For more information trunk groups, see “Port Trunking Example” on page 97.
All ports that are involved in port mirroring must have memberships in the same VLANs.
If a port is configured for port mirroring, the port’s VLAN membership cannot be
changed. For more information on configuring port mirroring, see “Monitoring Ports” on
page 246.
84 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Example 1: Multiple VLANs with Tagging Adapters
BladeCenter
VLAN #1, 2, 3
VLAN #3
GbE
Switch Module
Figure 3-6 Example 1: Multiple VLANs with VLAN-Tagged Gigabit Adapters
The features of this VLAN are described below:
Component
Description
GbE Switch
Module
This switch is configured for three VLANs that represent three differ-
ent IP subnets. Two servers and five clients are attached to the switch.
Server #1
This server is a member of VLAN 3 and has presence in only one IP
subnet. The associated internal switch port is only a member of VLAN
3, so tagging is disabled.
Server #2
This high-use server needs to be accessed from all VLANs and IP sub-
nets. The server has a VLAN-tagging adapter installed with VLAN tag-
ging turned on. The adapter is attached to one of the internal switch
ports, that is a member of VLANs 1, 2, and 3, and has tagging enabled.
Because of the VLAN tagging capabilities of both the adapter and the
switch, the server is able to communicate on all three IP subnets in this
network. Broadcast separation between all three VLANs and subnets,
however, is maintained.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Component
Description
PCs #1 and #2
These PCs are attached to a shared media hub that is then connected to
the switch. They belong to VLAN 2 and are logically in the same IP
subnet as Server 2 and PC 5. The associated external switch port has
tagging disabled.
PC #3
PC #4
PC #5
A member of VLAN 1, this PC can only communicate with Server 2
and PC 5. The associated external switch port has tagging disabled.
A member of VLAN 3, this PC can only communicate with Server 1
and Server 2. The associated external switch port has tagging disabled.
A member of both VLAN 1 and VLAN 2, this PC has a VLAN-tagging
Gigabit Ethernet adapter installed. It can communicate with Server 2
and PC 3 via VLAN 1, and to Server 2, PC 1 and PC 2 via VLAN 2.
The associated external switch port is a member of VLAN 1 and
VLAN 2, and has tagging enabled.
NOTE – VLAN tagging is required only on ports that are connected to other GbE Switch
Modules or on ports that connect to tag-capable end-stations, such as servers with VLAN-
tagging adapters.
86 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Protocol-based VLANs
Protocol-based VLANs (PVLANs) allow you to segment network traffic according to the net-
work protocols in use. Traffic generated by supported network protocols can be confined to a
particular port-based VLAN. You can give different priority levels to traffic generated by dif-
ferent network protocols.
With PVLAN, the switch classifies incoming packets by Ethernet protocol of the packets, not
by the configuration of the ingress port. When an untagged or priority-tagged frame arrives at
an ingress port, the protocol information carried in the frame is used to determine a VLAN to
which the frame belongs. If a frame’s protocol is not recognized as a pre-defined PVLAN type,
the ingress port’s PVID is assigned to the frame. When a tagged frame arrives, the VLAN ID in
the frame’s tag is used.
Each VLAN can contain up to eight different PVLANs. You can configure separate PVLANs
on different VLANs, with each PVLAN segmenting traffic for the same protocol type. For
example, you can configure PVLAN 1 on VLAN 2 to segment IPv4 traffic, and PVLAN 8 on
VLAN 100 to segment IPv4 traffic.
To define a PVLAN on a VLAN, configure a PVLAN number (1-8) and specify the frame type
and the Ethernet type of the PVLAN protocol. You must assign at least one port to the PVLAN
before it can function. Define the PVLAN frame type and Ethernet type as follows:
„
„
Frame type—consists of one of the following values:
†
†
†
Ether2 (Ethernet II)
SNAP (Simple Network Access Protocol)
LLC (Logical Link Control)
Ethernet type—consists of a 4-digit (16 bit) hex value that defines the Ethernet type. You
can use common Ethernet protocol values, or define your own values. Following are
examples of common Ethernet protocol values:
†
†
†
IPv4 = 0080
IPv6 = 86dd
ARP = 0806
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port-based vs. Protocol-based VLANs
Each VLAN supports both port-based and protocol-based association, as follows:
„
„
The default VLAN configuration is port-based. All data ports are members of VLAN 1,
with no PVLAN association.
When you add ports to a PVLAN, the ports become members of both the port-based
VLAN and the PVLAN. For example, if you add port EXT1 to PVLAN 1 on VLAN 2, the
port also becomes a member of VLAN 2.
„
„
When you delete a PVLAN, it’s member ports remain members of the port-based VLAN.
For example, if you delete PVLAN 1 from VLAN 2, port EXT1 remains a member of
VLAN 2.
When you delete a port from a VLAN, the port is deleted from all corresponding
PVLANs.
PVLAN Priority Levels
You can assign each PVLAN a priority value of 0-7, used for Quality of Service (QoS).
PVLAN priority takes precedence over a port’s configured priority level. If no priority level is
configured for the PVLAN (priority = 0), each port’s priority is used (if configured).
All member ports of a PVLAN have the same PVLAN priority level.
PVLAN Tagging
When PVLAN tagging is enabled, the switch tags frames that match the PVLAN protocol. For
more information about tagging, see “VLAN Tagging” on page 80.
Untagged ports must have PVLAN tagging disabled. Tagged ports can have PVLAN tagging
either enabled or disabled.
PVLAN tagging has higher precedence than port-based tagging. If a port is tag enabled
(/cfg/port x/tag), and the port is a member of a PVLAN, the PVLAN tags egress
frames that match the PVLAN protocol.
Use the tag list command (/cfg/l2/vlan x/pvlan x/taglist) to define the com-
plete list of tag-enabled ports in the PVLAN. Note that all ports not included in the PVLAN tag
list will have PVLAN tagging disabled.
88 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
PVLAN Configuration Guidelines
Consider the following guidelines when you configure protocol-based VLANs:
„
„
„
„
„
„
Each port can support up to 16 VLAN protocols.
The GbESM can support up to 16 protocols simultaneously.
Each PVLAN must have at least one port assigned before it can be activated.
The same port within a port-based VLAN can belong to multiple PVLANs.
An untagged port can be a member of multiple PVLANs.
A port cannot be a member of different VLANs with the same protocol association.
Configuring PVLAN
Follow this procedure to configure a Protocol-based VLAN (PVLAN).
1. Create a VLAN and define the protocol type(s) supported by the VLAN.
>> /cfg/l2/vlan 2
>> VLAN 2# ena
(Select VLAN 2)
Current status: disabled
New status:
enabled
>> VLAN 2# pvlan
Enter protocol number [1-8]:1
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# pty
(Select a protocol number)
Current FrameType: empty; EtherType: empty
Enter new frame type(Ether2/SNAP/LLC): ether2 (Define the frame type)
Enter new Ether type: 0800
(Define the Ethernet type)
New pending FrameType: Ether2; EtherType: 0800
2. Configure the priority value for the protocol.
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# prio
(Configure the priority value)
Current protocol priority: 0
Enter new protocol priority [0-7]: 1
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Add member ports for this PVLAN.
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# add int1
Port INT1 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 2 [y/n]: y
Current ports for VLAN 2:
empty
Current ports for VLAN 1, Protocol 3:
Pending new ports for VLAN 2: INT1
empty
Pending new ports for VLAN 2, Protocol 1: INT1
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# add ext1
Port EXT1 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 2 [y/n]: y
Current ports for VLAN 2:
empty
Current ports for VLAN 1, Protocol 2:
empty
INT1 EXT1
Pending new ports for VLAN 2:
Pending new ports for VLAN 2, Protocol 1:
INT1 EXT1
4. Configure VLAN tagging for ports.
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# /cfg/port int1/tag ena
(Enable tagging on port)
Current VLAN tag support: disabled
New VLAN tag support:
enabled
Port INT1 changed to tagged.
>> Port INT1# /cfg/l2/vlan 2/pvlan 1/tagpvl
(Enable PVLAN tagging)
Enter port to be tagged:
Ena/Dis pvlan tag:
int1
ena
Current status: disabled
New status:
enabled
WARN: Tagging status of Port 1 in VLAN 2 will be changed for
all protocols.
Confirm changing port's pvlan tagging status [y/n]: y
5. Enable the PVLAN.
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# ena
Current status: disabled
(Enable the protocol-based VLAN)
New status:
enabled
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# apply
>> VLAN 2 Protocol 1# save
(Apply the configuration)
(Save your changes)
90 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
6. Verify PVLAN operation.
>> /info/l2/vlan
(View VLAN information)
VLAN
Name
Status
Ports
---- ------------------------ ------ -------------------------
1
2
Default VLAN
VLAN 2
ena
ena
ena
ena
INT1-INT14 EXT2-EXT6
INT1 EXT1
EXT7
4094 EXT-Mgmt VLAN
4095 Mgmt VLAN
MGT1 MGT2
PVLAN Protocol FrameType EtherType Priority Status
Ports
----- -------- -------------------- -------- ------ -----------
2
1
Ether2
0800
0
ena
INT1
PVLAN
PVLAN-Tagged Ports
----- ---------------------------
2
INT1 INT2
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 3: VLANs „ 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
92 „ Chapter 3: VLANs
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4
Ports and Trunking
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth, multi-link connections between GbE Switch Mod-
ing their bandwidth to create a single, larger virtual link. This chapter provides configuration
background and examples for trunking multiple ports together:
„
„
„
„
“ Overview” on this page
“Port Trunking Example” on page 97
“Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm” on page 100
“Link Aggregation Control Protocol” on page 101
42C4911, January 2007
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Overview
When using port trunk groups between two switches, as shown in Figure 4-1, you can create a
virtual link between the switches, operating up to 60Gb per second, depending on how many
physical ports are combined. Each GbESM supports up to 13 trunk groups, and each trunk
group can contain up to six member ports.
BladeCenter
Aggregate
port trunk
Alteon Application Switch
Figure 4-1 Port Trunk Group
Trunk groups are also useful for connecting a GbE Switch Module to third-party devices that
support link aggregation, such as Cisco routers and switches with EtherChannel technology
(not ISL trunking technology) and Sun's Quad Fast Ethernet Adapter. Trunk Group technology
is compatible with these devices when they are configured manually.
94 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Statistical Load Distribution
Network traffic is statistically distributed between the ports in a trunk group. The Alteon OS-
powered switch uses the Layer 2 MAC address information present in each transmitted frame
for determining load distribution.
Each packet’s particular combination of source and destination MAC addresses results in
selecting one line in the trunk group for data transmission. If there are enough Layer 2 devices
feeding the trunk lines, then traffic distribution becomes relatively even.
Built-In Fault Tolerance
Since each trunk group is comprised of multiple physical links, the trunk group is inherently
fault tolerant. As long as one connection between the switches is available, the trunk remains
active.
Statistical load balancing is maintained whenever a port in a trunk group is lost or returned to
service.
Before you configure static trunks
When you create and enable a static trunk, the trunk members (switch ports) take on certain
settings necessary for correct operation of the trunking feature.
Before you configure your trunk, you must consider these settings, along with specific config-
uration rules, as follows:
1. Read the configuration rules provided in the section, “Trunk group configuration rules”
on page 96.”
2. Determine which switch ports (up to six) are to become trunk members (the specific ports
Ensure that the chosen switch ports are set to enabled, using the /cfg/portcommand.
Trunk member ports must have the same VLAN configuration.
3. Consider how the existing Spanning Tree will react to the new trunk configuration. See
Chapter 5, “Spanning Tree Group” for Spanning Tree Group configuration guidelines.
4. Consider how existing VLANs will be affected by the addition of a trunk.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking „ 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Trunk group configuration rules
The trunking feature operates according to specific configuration rules. When creating trunks,
consider the following rules that determine how a trunk group reacts in any network topology:
„
All trunks must originate from one device, and lead to one destination device. For exam-
ple, you cannot combine a link from Server 1 and a link from Server 2, into one trunk
group.
„
„
„
Any physical switch port can belong to only one trunk group.
Trunking from third-party devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.
All trunk member ports must be assigned to the same VLAN configuration before the
trunk can be enabled.
„
„
If you change the VLAN settings of any trunk member, you cannot apply the change until
you change the VLAN settings of all trunk members.
When an active port is configured in a trunk, the port becomes a trunk member when you
enable the trunk using the /cfg/l2/trunk/ena command. The Spanning Tree
parameters for the port then change to reflect the new trunk settings.
„
All trunk members must be in the same Spanning Tree Group (STG) and can belong to
only one Spanning Tree Group (STG). However if all ports are tagged, then all trunk ports
can belong to multiple STGs.
„
„
If you change the Spanning Tree participation of any trunk member to enabledor dis-
abled, the Spanning Tree participation of all members of that trunk changes similarly.
When a trunk is enabled, the trunk Spanning Tree participation setting takes precedence
over that of any trunk member.
„
„
You cannot configure a trunk member as a monitor port in a port-mirroring configuration.
Trunks cannot be monitored by a monitor port; however, trunk members can be moni-
tored.
„
To guarantee proper trunking behavior, all ports in static trunks must be configured for
full-duplex mode (cfg/port x/gig/mode full).
96 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port Trunking Example
In the example below, three ports are trunked between two switches.
Alteon Application Switch
Trunk 3: Potrs 2, 12, and 22
Trunk 1: Potrs EXT1, EXT2, and EXT3
GbE Swicth
Module
BladeCenter
Figure 4-2 Port Trunk Group Configuration Example
Prior to configuring each switch in the above example, you must connect to the appropriate
switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) as the administrator.
NOTE – For details about accessing and using any of the menu commands described in this
example, see the Alteon OS Command Reference.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking „ 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
1. Connect the switch ports that will be members in the trunk group.
2. Follow these steps on the GbESM:
(a) Define a trunk group.
>> # /cfg/l2/trunk 1
(Select trunk group 1)
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT1
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT2
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT3
>> Trunk group 1# ena
(Add port EXT1 to trunk group 1)
(Add port EXT2 to trunk group 1)
(Add port EXT3 to trunk group 1)
(Enable trunk group 1)
(b)Apply and verify the configuration.
>> Trunk group 1# apply
(Make your changes active)
>> Trunk group 1# cur
(View current trunking configuration)
Examine the resulting information. If any settings are incorrect, make appropriate changes.
(c) Save your new configuration changes.
>> Trunk group 1# save
(Save for restore after reboot)
3. Repeat the process on the other switch.
>> # /cfg/l2/trunk 3
(Select trunk group 3)
>> Trunk group 3# add 2
>> Trunk group 3# add 12
>> Trunk group 3# add 22
>> Trunk group 3# ena
>> Trunk group 3# apply
>> Trunk group 3# cur
>> Trunk group 3# save
(Add port 2 to trunk group 3)
(Add port 12 to trunk group 3)
(Add port 22 to trunk group 3)
(Enable trunk group 3)
(Make your changes active)
(View current trunking configuration)
(Save for restore after reboot)
Trunk group 1 (on the GbESM) is now connected to trunk group 3 (on Alteon Application
Switch).
NOTE – In this example, a GbE Switch Module and an application switch are used. If a third-
party device supporting link aggregation is used (such as Cisco routers and switches with
EtherChannel technology or Sun's Quad Fast Ethernet Adapter), trunk groups on the third-
party device should be configured manually. Connection problems could arise when using
automatic trunk group negotiation on the third-party device.
98 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
4. Examine the trunking information on each switch.
>> /info/l2/trunk
(View trunking information)
Information about each port in each configured trunk group is displayed. Make sure that trunk
groups consist of the expected ports and that each port is in the expected state.
The following restrictions apply:
„
„
„
Any physical switch port can belong to only one trunk group.
Up to six ports can belong to the same trunk group.
Best performance is achieved when all ports in any given trunk group are configured for
the same speed.
„
Trunking from third-party devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking „ 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm
This feature allows you to configure the particular parameters for the GbESM Trunk Hash
algorithm instead of having to utilize the defaults. You can configure new default behavior for
Layer 2 traffic and Layer 3 traffic using the CLI menu cfg/l2/thash. You can select a
minimum of one or a maximum of two parameters to create one of the following configura-
tions:
„
„
„
„
„
„
Source IP (SIP)
Destination IP (DIP)
Source MAC (SMAC)
Destination MAC (DMAC)
Source IP (SIP) + Destination IP (DIP)
Source MAC (SMAC) + Destination MAC (DMAC)
100 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is an IEEE 802.3ad standard for grouping several
physical ports into one logical port (known as a dynamic trunk group or Link Aggregation
group) with any device that supports the standard. Please refer to IEEE 802.3ad-2002 for a full
description of the standard.
The 802.3ad standard allows standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link using the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Link aggregation is a method of grouping physi-
cal link segments of the same media type and speed in full duplex, and treating them as if they
were part of a single, logical link segment. If a link in a LACP trunk group fails, traffic is reas-
signed dynamically to the remaining link/s of the dynamic trunk group.
NOTE – LACP implementation in Alteon OS does not support the Churn machine, an option
used to detect if the port is operable within a bounded time period between the actor
and the partner. Only the Market Responder is implemented, and there is no marker protocol
generator.
A port’s Link Aggregation Identifier (LAG ID) determines how the port can be aggregated.
The Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) is constructed mainly from the system ID and the port’s
admin key, as follows:
System ID is an integer value based on the switch’s MAC address and the system priority
assigned in the CLI.
Admin key
GbESM port that participates in the same LACP trunk group must have the same admin key
value. The Admin key is local significant, which means the partner switch does not need to use
the same Admin key value.
For example, consider two switches, an Actor (the GbESM) and a Partner (another switch), as
shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Actor vs. Partner LACP configuration
Actor Switch
Partner Switch 1
Partner Switch 2
Port EXT1 (admin key = 100)
Port EXT2 (admin key = 100)
Port 1 (admin key = 50)
Port 2 (admin key = 50)
In the configuration shown in Table 4-1, Actor switch ports EXT1 and EXT2 aggregate to
form an LACP trunk group with Partner switch ports 1 and 2.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking „ 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then aggregates
them. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical links for the link aggrega-
tion.
Each port in the GbESM can have one of the following LACP modes.
„
off (default)
The user can configure this port in to a regular static trunk group.
„
active
The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port sends LACPDU packets to part-
ner system ports.
„
passive
The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port only responds to the LACPDU
packets sent from an LACP active port.
Each active LACP port transmits LACP data units (LACPDUs), while each passive LACP
port listens for LACPDUs. During LACP negotiation, the admin key is exchanged. The LACP
trunk group is enabled as long as the information matches at both ends of the link. If the admin
key value changes for a port at either end of the link, that port’s association with the LACP
trunk group is lost.
When the system is initialized, all ports by default are in LACP off mode and are assigned
unique admin keys. To make a group of ports aggregatable, you assign them all the same
admin key. You must set the port’s LACP mode to active to activate LACP negotiation. You
can set other port’s LACP mode to passive, to reduce the amount of LACPDU traffic at the ini-
tial trunk-forming stage.
Use the /info/l2/trunkcommand or the /info/l2/lacp/dumpcommand to check
whether the ports are trunked.
NOTE – If you configure LACP on ports with 802.1x network access control, make sure the
ports on both sides of the connection are properly configured for both LACP and 802.1x.
102 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring LACP
Use the following procedure to configure LACP for port EXT1 and port EXT2 to participate in
link aggregation.
1. Set the LACP mode on port EXT1.
>> # /cfg/l2/lacp/port EXT1
(Select port EXT1)
>> LACP port EXT1# mode active
(Set port EXT1 to LACP active mode)
2. Define the admin key on port EXT1. Only ports with the same admin key can form a
LACP trunk group.
>> LACP port EXT1# adminkey 100
(Set port EXT1 adminkey to 100)
Current LACP port adminkey:
17
New pending LACP port adminkey: 100
3. Set the LACP mode on port EXT2.
>> # /cfg/l2/lacp/port EXT2
(Select port EXT2)
>> LACP port EXT2# mode active
(Set port EXT2 to LACP active mode)
4. Define the admin key on port EXT2.
>> LACP port EXT2# adminkey 100
(Set port EXT2 adminkey to 100)
Current LACP port adminkey:
18
New pending LACP port adminkey: 100
5. Apply and verify the configuration.
>> LACP port EXT2# apply
(Make your changes active)
>> LACP port EXT2# cur
(View current trunking configuration)
6. Save your new configuration changes.
>> LACP port EXT2# save
(Save for restore after reboot)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking „ 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
104 „ Chapter 4: Ports and Trunking
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5
Spanning Tree Group
chapter:
„
„
„
„
„
“Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs)” on page 107
“Multiple Spanning Trees” on page 110
“Port Fast Forwarding” on page 115
“Fast Uplink Convergence” on page 116
42C4911, January 2007
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Overview
Spanning Tree Group (STG) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched net-
work. When multiple paths exist, Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses
only the most efficient path. If that path fails, Spanning Tree automatically sets up another
active path on the network to sustain network operations.
GbESM supports IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. It is compatible with PVST+ by con-
figuring each STP Group in different STP instances.
NOTE – The GbESM also supports IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, and
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. For more information, see Chapter 6,
“Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.”
The relationship between port, trunk groups, VLANs, and Spanning Trees is shown in
Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Ports, Trunk Groups, and VLANs
Switch Element
Belongs to
Port
Trunk group
or
One or more VLANs
Trunk group
One or more VLANs
VLAN (non-default)
One Spanning Tree group
NOTE – Due to Spanning Tree’s sequence of listening, learning, and forwarding or blocking,
lengthy delays may occur.
You can use Port Fast Forwarding (/cfg/port x/fastfwd/ena) to permit a port that
participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly
into the Forwarding state. While in the Forwarding state, the port listens to the BPDUs to learn
if there is a loop and, if dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities, and so on), the
port transitions into the Blocking state. This feature permits the GbE Switch Module to inter-
operate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks.
106 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs)
To create a Spanning Tree, the switch generates a configuration Bridge Protocol Data Unit
(BPDU), which it then forwards out of its ports. All switches in the Layer 2 network participat-
ing in the Spanning Tree gather information about other switches in the network through an
exchange of BPDUs.
A BPDU is a 64-byte packet that is sent out at a configurable interval, which is typically set for
two seconds. The BPDU is used to establish a path, much like a “hello” packet in IP routing.
BPDUs contain information about the transmitting bridge and its ports, including bridge and
MAC addresses, bridge priority, port priority, and path cost. If the ports are tagged, each port
sends out a special BPDU containing the tagged information.
The generic action of a switch on receiving a BPDU is to compare the received BPDU to its
own BPDU that it will transmit. If the received BPDU is better than its own BPDU, it will
replace its BPDU with the received BPDU. Then, the switch adds its own bridge ID number
and increments the path cost of the BPDU. The switch uses this information to block any nec-
essary ports.
Determining the Path for Forwarding BPDUs
When determining which port to use for forwarding and which port to block, the GbE Switch
Module uses information in the BPDU, including each bridge priority ID. A technique based
on the “lowest root cost” is then computed to determine the most efficient path for forwarding.
Bridge Priority
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. To
make one switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and
bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. Use the following
command to configure the bridge priority:
/cfg/l2/stg x/brg/prio
Port Priority
The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network
topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest
port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Use the following command to con-
figure the port priority:
/cfg/l2/stg x/port x/prio
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group „ 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port Path Cost
The port path cost assigns lower values to high-bandwidth ports, such as Gigabit Ethernet, to
encourage their use. The cost of a port also depends on whether the port operates at full-duplex
(lower cost) or half-duplex (higher cost). For example, if a 100-Mbps (Fast Ethernet) link has a
“cost” of 10 in half-duplex mode, it will have a cost of 5 in full-duplex mode. The objective is
to use the fastest links so that the route with the lowest cost is chosen. A value of 0 indicates
that the default cost will be computed for an auto-negotiated link speed.
Spanning Tree Group configuration guidelines
This section provides important information on configuring Spanning Tree Groups (STGs):
Adding a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group
„
If no VLANs exist beyond the default VLAN 1 see “Creating a VLAN” on page 108 for
information on adding ports to VLANs.
„
Add the VLAN to the STG using the /cfg/l2/stg<stg-#>/add <vlan-number>
command.
NOTE – To ensure proper operation with switches that use Cisco Per VLAN Spanning
Tree (PVST+), you must either create a separate STG for each VLAN, or
manually add all associated VLANs into a single STG.
Creating a VLAN
When you create a VLAN, that VLAN automatically belongs to STG 1, the default STG. If you
want the VLAN in another STG, you must move the VLAN by assigning it to another STG.
Move a newly created VLAN to an existing STG by following this order:
†
†
Create the VLAN
Add the VLAN to an existing STG
„
VLANs must be contained within a single STG; a VLAN cannot span multiple STGs. By
confining VLANs within a single STG, you avoid problems with spanning tree blocking
ports and causing a loss of connectivity within the VLAN. When a VLAN spans multiple
switches, it is recommended that the VLAN remain within the same Spanning Tree Group
(have the same STG ID) across all the switches.
108 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
„
If ports are tagged, all trunked ports can belong to multiple STGs.
A port that is not a member of any VLAN cannot be added to any STG. The port must be
added to a VLAN, and that VLAN added to the desired STG.
Rules for VLAN Tagged ports
„
„
„
Tagged ports can belong to more than one STG, but untagged ports can belong to only one
STG.
When a tagged port belongs to more than one STG, the egress BPDUs are tagged to distin-
guish the BPDUs of one STG from those of another STG.
An untagged port cannot span multiple STGs.
Adding and removing ports from STGs
„
When you add a port to a VLAN that belongs to an STG, the port is also added to the STG.
However, if the port you are adding is an untagged port and is already a member of an
STG, that port will not be added to an additional STG because an untagged port cannot
belong to more that one STG.
For example, assume that VLAN 1 belongs to STG 1. You add an untagged port, port 1,
that does not belong to any STG to VLAN 1, and port 1 will become part of STG 1.
If you add untagged port 5 (which is a member to STG 2) to STG 1, the switch will
prompt you to change the PVID from 2 to 1:
"Port 5 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 2.
Confirm changing PVID from 2 to 1 [y/n]:" y
„
When you remove a port from VLAN that belongs to an STG, that port will also be
removed from the STG. However, if that port belongs to another VLAN in the same STG,
the port remains in the STG.
As an example, assume that port 1 belongs to VLAN 1, and VLAN 1 belongs to STG 1.
When you remove port 1 from VLAN 1, port 1 is also removed from STG 1.
However, if port 1 belongs to both VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 and both VLANs belong to
STG 1, removing port 1 from VLAN 1 does not remove port 1 from STG 1 because
VLAN 2 is still a member of STG 1.
„
An STG cannot be deleted, only disabled. If you disable the STG while it still contains
VLAN members, Spanning Tree will be off on all ports belonging to that VLAN.
The relationship between port, trunk groups, VLANs, and Spanning Trees is shown in
Table 5-1.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group „ 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Multiple Spanning Trees
Each GbE Switch Module supports a maximum of 128 Spanning Tree Groups (STGs). Multi-
ple STGs provide multiple data paths, which can be used for load-balancing and redundancy.
You enable load balancing between two GbE Switch Modules using multiple STGs by config-
uring each path with a different VLAN and then assigning each VLAN to a separate STG. Each
STG is independent. Each STG sends its own Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs), and each
STG must be independently configured.
The STG, or bridge group, forms a loop-free topology that includes one or more virtual LANs
(VLANs). The switch supports 128 STGs running simultaneously. The default STG 1 may
contain an unlimited number of VLANs. All other STGs 2-128 may contain only one VLAN
each.
Default Spanning Tree configuration
In the default configuration, a single STG with the ID of 1 includes all non-management ports
on the switch. It is called the default STG. Although ports can be added to or deleted from the
default STG, the default STG (STG 1) itself cannot be deleted from the system.
All other STGs, except the default STG 1 and the management STG 127 and STG 128, are
empty and VLANs must be added by the user. However, you cannot assign ports directly to
an STG. Add ports to a VLAN and add the VLAN to the STG. The default configuration of
management STG 127 contains VLAN 4094 and port EXT7. The default configuration of
management STG 128 contains VLAN 4095 and internal management ports MGT1 and
MGT2.
Each STG is enabled by default, and assigned an ID number from 2 to 126. By default, the
spanning tree on the management ports (MGT1, MGT2, and EXT7) is turned off in both STP/
PVST+ mode and in MSTP/RSTP mode.
110 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Why Do We Need Multiple Spanning Trees?
Figure 5-1 shows a simple example of why we need multiple Spanning Trees. Two VLANs,
VLAN 1 and VLAN 100 exist between application switch A and GbE Switch Module B. If
you have a single Spanning Tree Group, the switches see an apparent loop, and one VLAN
may become blocked, affecting connectivity, even though no actual loop exists.
If VLAN 1 and VLAN 100 belong to different Spanning Tree Groups, then the two instances
of Spanning Tree separate the topology without forming a loop. Both VLANs can forward
packets between the switches without losing connectivity.
BladeCenter
GbE Switch
Module B
Figure 5-1 Using Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree Group
Switch-Centric Spanning Tree Group
In Figure 5-2 on page 112, VLAN 2 is shared by application switch A and GbE Switch Module
B on ports 8 and 17 respectively. Application Switch A identifies VLAN 2 in Spanning Tree
Group 2 and GbE Switch Module B identifies VLAN 2 in Spanning Tree Group 1. Spanning
Tree Group is switch-centric—it is used to identify the VLANs participating in the Spanning
Tree Groups. The Spanning Tree Group ID is not transmitted in the BPDU. Each Spanning
Tree decision is based on the configuration of that switch.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group „ 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
17
18
Switch B
BladeCenter
Figure 5-2 Implementing Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
VLAN Participation in Spanning Tree Groups
The VLAN participation for each Spanning Tree Group in Figure 5-2 on page 112 is discussed
in the following sections:
„
VLAN 1 Participation
If application switch A is the root bridge, then application switch A will transmit the
BPDU for VLAN 1 on ports 1 and 2. Application switch C receives the BPDU on its
port 2 and application switch D receives the BPDU on its port 1. Application switch D will
block port 8 or application switch C will block port 1 depending on the information pro-
vided in the BPDU.
„
VLAN 2 Participation
Application switch A, the root bridge generates another BPDU for Spanning Tree Group 2
and forwards it out from port 8. GbE Switch Module B receives this BPDU on its port 17.
Port 17 on GbE Switch Module B is on VLAN 2, Spanning Tree Group 2. Because switch
B has no additional ports participating in Spanning Tree Group 1, this BPDU is not for-
warded to any additional ports and application switch A remains the designated root.
112 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
VLAN 3 Participation
For VLAN 3 you can have GbE Switch Module B or application switch C to be the root
bridge. If switch B is the root bridge for VLAN 3, Spanning Tree Group 2, then switch B
transmits the BPDU out from port 18. Application switch C receives this BPDU on port 8
and is identified as participating in VLAN 3, Spanning Tree Group 2. Since application
switch C has no additional ports participating in Spanning Tree Group 2, this BPDU is not
Configuring Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
This configuration shows how to configure the three instances of Spanning Tree Groups on the
switches A, B, C, and D illustrated in Figure 5-2 on page 112.
By default Spanning Trees 2-126 are empty, and Spanning Tree Group 1 contains all config-
ured VLANs until individual VLANs are explicitly assigned to other Spanning Tree Groups.
You can have only one VLAN per Spanning Tree Group except for Spanning Tree Group 1.
1. Configure the following on application switch A:
Add port 8 to VLAN 2 and define Spanning Tree Group 2 for VLAN 2.
>> # /cfg/l2/vlan2
>> VLAN 2# add 8
(Select VLAN 2 menu)
(Add port 8)
>> VLAN 2# ../stg 2
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# add 2
(Select Spanning Tree Group 2)
(Add VLAN 2)
VLAN 2 is automatically removed from Spanning Tree Group 1.
2. Configure the following on GbE Switch Module B:
Add port 17 to VLAN 2, port 18 to VLAN 3 and define Spanning Tree Group 2 for VLAN 3.
>> # /cfg/l2/vlan2
>> VLAN 2# add 17
(Select VLAN 2 menu)
(Add port 17)
>> VLAN 2# ../vlan3
>> VLAN 3# add 18
(Select VLAN 3 menu)
(Add port 18)
>> VLAN 3# ../stg 2
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# add 3
(Select Spanning Tree Group 2)
(Add VLAN 3)
VLAN 3 is removed from Spanning Tree Group 1 and, by default, VLAN 2 remains in
Spanning Tree Group 1.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group „ 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
NOTE – Each instance of Spanning Tree Group is enabled by default.
3. Configure the following on application switch C:
Add port 8 to VLAN 3 and define Spanning Tree Group 3 for VLAN 3.
>> # /cfg/l2/vlan3
(Select VLAN 3 menu)
>> VLAN 3# add 8
(Add port 8)
>> VLAN 3# ../stg 2
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# add 3
(Select Spanning Tree Group 2)
(Add VLAN 3)
VLAN 3 is automatically removed from Spanning Tree Group 1 and by default VLAN 2
remains in Spanning Tree Group 1.
NOTE – Application Switch D does not require any special configuration for multiple Spanning
Trees, because it is configured for the default Spanning Tree Group (STG 1) only.
114 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port Fast Forwarding
Port Fast Forwarding permits a port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening
and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state. While in the Forwarding state,
the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and, if dictated by normal STG behavior
(following priorities, etc.), the port transitions into the Blocking state.
This feature permits the GbE Switch Module to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree
(RSTP) networks.
Configuring Port Fast Forwarding
Use the following CLI commands to enable Port Fast Forwarding on an external port.
>> # /cfg/port ext1
>> Port EXT1# fastfwd ena
>> Port EXT1# apply
>> Port EXT1# save
(Select port EXT 1)
(Enable Port Fast Forwarding)
(Make your changes active)
(Save for restore after reboot)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group „ 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Fast Uplink Convergence
Fast Uplink Convergence enables the GbESM to quickly recover from the failure of the pri-
mary link or trunk group in a Layer 2 network using Spanning Tree Protocol. Normal recovery
can take as long as 50 seconds, while the backup link transitions from Blocking to Listening to
Learning and then Forwarding states. With Fast Uplink Convergence enabled, the GbESM
immediately places the secondary path into Forwarding state, and sends multicasts of
addresses in the forwarding database (FDB) and ARP table over the secondary link so that
upstream switches can learn the new path.
Configuration Guidelines
When you enable Fast Uplink Convergence, Alteon OS automatically makes the following
configuration changes:
„
„
Sets the bridge priority to 65535 so that it does not become the root switch.
Increases the cost of all of the external ports by 3000, across all VLANs and Spanning
Tree Groups. This ensures that traffic never flows through the GbESM to get to another
switch unless there is no other path.
These changes are reversed if the feature is disabled.
Configuring Fast Uplink Convergence
Use the following CLI commands to enable Fast Uplink Convergence on external ports.
>> # /cfg/l2/upfast ena
>> Layer 2# apply
>> Layer 2# save
(Enable Fast Uplink convergence)
(Make your changes active)
(Save for restore after reboot)
116 „ Chapter 5: Spanning Tree Group
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol enhances the Spanning Tree Protocol to provide
ing in a VLAN environment.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
„
“Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol” on page 118
†
†
†
†
„
†
†
†
†
“MSTP Region” on page 121
“Common Internal Spanning Tree” on page 121
“MSTP Configuration Guidelines” on page 122
“MSTP Configuration Example” on page 122
42C4911, January 2007
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree and
provides for fast re-configuration critical for networks carrying delay-sensitive traffic such as
voice and video. RSTP significantly reduces the time to reconfigure the active topology of the
network when changes occur to the physical topology or its configuration parameters. RSTP
reduces the bridged-LAN topology to a single Spanning Tree.
For more information about Spanning Tree Protocol, see Chapter 5, “Spanning Tree Group.”
RSTP parameters are configured in Spanning Tree Group 1. STP Groups 2-128 do not apply to
RSTP, and must be cleared. There are new STP parameters to support RSTP, and some values
to existing parameters are different.
RSTP is compatible with devices that run 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. If the switch detects
802.1d BPDUs, it responds with 802.1d-compatible data units. RSTP is not compatible with
Per VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST+) protocol.
Port State Changes
The port state controls the forwarding and learning processes of Spanning Tree. In RSTP, the
port state has been consolidated to the following: discarding, learning, and forwarding. Table 3
compares the port states between 802.1d Spanning Tree and 802.1w Rapid Spanning Trees.
Table 3 RSTP vs. STP Port states
Operational status
Enabled
STP Port State
Blocking
RSTP Port State
Discarding
Discarding
Learning
Enabled
Listening
Enabled
Learning
Enabled
Forwarding
Disabled
Forwarding
Discarding
Disabled
118 „ Chapter 6: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Port Type and Link Type
Spanning Tree configuration includes the following parameters to support
RSTP and MSTP: edge port and link type. Although these parameters are configured for
Spanning Tree Groups 1-128 (/cfg/l2/stg x/port x), they only take effect when
RSTP/MSTP is turned on.
Edge Port
A port that does not connect to a bridge is called an edge port. Edge ports generally connect to
a server, therefore, ports INT1-INT14 should have edgeenabled. Edge ports can start for-
warding as soon as the link is up.
Edge ports do not take part in Spanning Tree, and should not receive BPDUs. If a port with
edgeenabled does receive a BPDU, it begins STP processing only if it is connected to a span-
ning tree bridge. If it is connected to a host, the edge port ignores BPDUs.
Link Type
The link type determines how the port behaves in regard to Rapid Spanning Tree. The link type
corresponds to the duplex mode of the port. A full-duplex link is point-to-point (p2p), while a
half-duplex link should be configured as shared. If you select autoas the link type, the port
dynamically configures the link type.
RSTP Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Groups:
„
„
When RSTP is turned on, STP parameters apply only to STP Group 1.
When RSTP is turned on, STG 2-126 are turned off.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 6: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol „ 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
RSTP Configuration Example
This section provides steps to configure Rapid Spanning Tree on the GbE Switch Module,
using the Command-Line Interface (CLI).
Configure Rapid Spanning Tree
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Disable and clear STP groups 2 through 126.
>> /cfg/l2/stg 2
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# clear
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# off
(Select Spanning Tree Group 2)
(Clear STP Group 2 parameters)
(Turn off STP Group 2)
3. Set the Spanning Tree mode to Rapid Spanning Tree.
>> /cfg/l2/mrst
>> Multiple Spanning Tree# mode rstp
>> Multiple Spanning Tree# on
(Select Multiple Spanning Tree menu)
(Set mode to Rapid Spanning Tree)
(Turn Rapid Spanning Tree on)
4. Configure STP Group 1 parameters.
>> /cfg/l2/stg 1
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# add 2
(Select Spanning Tree Protocol menu)
(Add VLAN 2 STP Group 1)
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# apply
(Apply the configurations)
120 „ Chapter 6: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree extends the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
through multiple Spanning Tree Groups. MSTP maintains up to 32 spanning-tree instances,
that correspond to STP Groups 1-32.
For more information about Spanning Tree Protocol, see Chapter 5, “Spanning Tree Group.”
In Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), several VLANs can be mapped to each Span-
ning-Tree instance. Each Spanning-Tree instance is independent of other instances. MSTP
allows frames assigned to different VLANs to follow separate paths, each path based on an
independent Spanning-Tree instance. This approach provides multiple forwarding paths for
data traffic, enabling load-balancing, and reducing the number of Spanning-Tree instances
required to support a large number of VLANs.
By default, the spanning tree on the management ports is turned off in both STP/PVST+ mode
and in MSTP/RSTP mode.
MSTP Region
A group of interconnected bridges that share the same attributes is called an MST region. Each
bridge within the region must share the following attributes:
„
„
„
Alphanumeric name
Revision number
VLAN-to STG mapping scheme
MSTP provides rapid re-configuration, scalability and control due to the support of regions,
and multiple Spanning-Tree instances support within each region.
Common Internal Spanning Tree
The Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) provides a common form of Spanning Tree Pro-
tocol, with one Spanning-Tree instance that can be used throughout the MSTP region. CIST
allows the switch to interoperate with legacy equipment, including devices that run IEEE
802.1d (STP).
CIST allows the MSTP region to act as a virtual bridge to other bridges outside of the region,
and provides a single Spanning-Tree instance to interact with them.
CIST port configuration includes Hello time, Edge port enable/disable, and Link Type. These
parameters do not affect Spanning Tree Groups 1-128. They apply only when the CIST is used.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 6: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol „ 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
MSTP Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring Multiple Spanning Tree
Groups:
„
When you enable MSTP, you must configure the Region Name, and a default version
number of 1 is configured automatically.
„
Each bridge in the region must have the same name, version number, and VLAN mapping.
MSTP Configuration Example
This section provides steps to configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GbE Switch
Module, using the Command-Line Interface (CLI).
Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Set the mode to Multiple Spanning Tree, and configure MSTP region parameters.
>> /cfg/l2/mrst
(Select Multiple Spanning Tree menu)
(Set mode to Multiple Spanning Trees)
(Turn Multiple Spanning Trees on)
(Define the Region name)
>> Multiple Spanning Tree# mode mstp
>> Multiple Spanning Tree# on
>> Multiple Spanning Tree# name xxxxxx
3. Assign VLANs to Spanning Tree Groups.
>> /cfg/l2/stg 2
>> Spanning Tree Group 2# add 2
(Select Spanning Tree Group 2)
(Add VLAN 2)
122 „ Chapter 6: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 7
Quality of Service
Quality of Service features allow you to allocate network resources to mission-critical applica-
The following topics are discussed in this section:
„
„
„
„
„
“Overview” on page 124
“Using ACL Filters” on page 126
“Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS” on page 134
“Using 802.1p Priorities to Provide QoS” on page 139
“Queuing and Scheduling” on page 140
42C4911, January 2007
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Overview
QoS helps you allocate guaranteed bandwidth to the critical applications, and limit bandwidth
for less critical applications. Applications such as video and voice must have a certain amount
of bandwidth to work correctly; using QoS, you can provide that bandwidth when necessary.
Also, you can put a high priority on applications that are sensitive to timing out or cannot toler-
By assigning QoS levels to traffic flows on your network, you can ensure that network
resources are allocated where they are needed most. QoS features allow you to prioritize net-
work traffic, thereby providing better service for selected applications.
Figure 7-1 shows the basic QoS model used by the GbESM.
Ingress Ports
Meter
Traffic
Perform
Actions
Queue and
Schedule
Egress
Classify
Packets
ACL
Filter
ACL
Meter
Drop/Pass/
Re-Mark
COS
Queue
Figure 7-1 QoS Model
The GbESM uses the Differentiated Services (DiffServ) architecture to provide QoS functions.
DiffServ is described in IETF RFCs 2474 and 2475.
With DiffServ, you can establish policies to direct traffic. A policy is a traffic-controlling
mechanism that monitors the characteristics of the traffic, (for example, its source, destination,
and protocol) and performs a controlling action on the traffic when certain characteristics are
matched.
The GbESM can classify traffic by reading the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) or IEEE 802.1p
priority value, or by using filters to match specific criteria. When network traffic attributes
match those specified in a traffic pattern, the policy instructs the GbESM to perform specified
actions on each packet that passes through it. The packets are assigned to different Class of
Service (COS) queues and scheduled for transmission.
124 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The basic GbESM QoS model works as follows:
„
Classify traffic:
†
†
†
Read DSCP
Read 802.1p Priority
Match ACL filter parameters
„
„
Meter traffic:
†
†
Define bandwidth and burst parameters
Select actions to perform on in-profile and out-of-profile traffic
Perform actions:
†
†
†
†
Drop packets
Pass packets
Mark DSCP or 802.1p Priority
Set COS queue (with or without re-marking)
„
Queue and schedule traffic:
†
†
Place packets in one of two COS queues
Schedule transmission based on the COS queue weight
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using ACL Filters
Access Control Lists are filters that allow you to classify and segment traffic, so you can pro-
vide different levels of service to different traffic types. Each filter defines the conditions that
must match for inclusion in the filter, and also the actions that are performed when a match is
made.
Summary of packet classifiers
The GbESM allows you to classify packets based on various parameters, such as:
„
Ethernet
† Source MAC address
† Destination MAC address
†
†
†
VLAN number/mask
Ethernet type
Ethernet Priority, which is the IEEE 802.1p Priority
„
IPv4
† Source IP address/mask
† Destination address/mask
†
†
Type of Service value
IP protocol number protocol number or name as shown in Table 7-1:.
Table 7-1 Well-Known Protocol Types
Number Protocol Name
1
2
6
icmp
igmp
tcp
17
89
112
udp
ospf
vrrp
„
TCP/UDP
†
†
†
TCP/UDP application source port as shown in Table 7-2 on page 127
TCP/UDP application destination port as shown in Table 7-2 on page 127
TCP/UDP flag value as shown in Table 7-3 on page 127
126 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Table 7-2 Well-Known Application Ports
Number TCP/UDP
Application
Number TCP/UDP
Application
Number
TCP/UDP
Application
20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70
ftp-data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
79
80
finger
http
pop2
pop3
sunrpc
nntp
179
194
220
389
443
520
554
bgp
irc
imap3
ldap
https
rip
109
110
111
119
123
143
144
161
162
ntp
rtsp
imap
news
snmp
snmptrap
1645, 1812 Radius
1813
1985
Radius Accounting
hsrp
gopher
Table 7-3 Well-Known TCP flag values
Flag
Value
URG
ACK
PSH
RST
SYN
FIN
0x0020
0x0010
0x0008
0x0004
0x0002
0x0001
„
Packet Format
†
†
†
Ethernet format (eth2, SNAP, LLC)
Ethernet tagging format
IP format (IPv4, IPv6)
„
Egress port packets
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Summary of ACL Actions
Actions determine how the traffic is treated. The GbESM QoS actions include the following:
„
„
„
„
Pass or Drop
Re-mark a new DiffServ Code Point (DSCP)
Re-mark the 802.1p field
Set the COS queue
Understanding ACL Precedence
Each ACL has a unique precedence level, based on its number. When an incoming packet
matches the highest precedence ACL, the ACL’s configured action takes place. The other
assigned ACLs also are considered, in order of precedence.
ACLs are divided into seven major Precedence Groups, as shown in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4 ACL Precedence Groups
Precedence Group
Precedence Group 1
Precedence Group 2
Precedence Group 3
ACLs
Precedence Level
ACL 1 - ACL 128
ACL 129 - ACL 256
ACL 257 - ACL 384
Low
High
NOTE – Precedence Groups are not related to ACL Groups.
Each Precedence Group has its own precedence level, such that Precedence Group 2 has a
higher precedence level than Precedence Group 1. Within each Precedence Group, the lowest-
numbered ACL has the lowest precedence level, and the highest-numbered ACL has the high-
est precedence level. However, the other ACLs within the Precedence Group have an unspeci-
fied precedence level, as follows:
ACL 1 = lowest precedence level within Precedence Group 1
ACL 2 = unspecified precedence level within Precedence Group 1
ACL 3 = unspecified precedence level within Precedence Group 1
...
ACL 126 = unspecified precedence level within Precedence Group 1
ACL 127 = unspecified precedence level within Precedence Group 1
ACL 128 = highest precedence level within Precedence Group 1
128 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using ACL Groups
Access Control Lists (ACLs) allow you to classify packets according to a particular content in
the packet header, such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destina-
tion port number, and others. Packet classifiers identify flows for more processing.
You can define a traffic profile by compiling a number of ACLs into an ACL Group, and
assigning the ACL Group to a port.
ACL Groups are assigned and enabled on a per-port basis. Each ACL can be used by itself or
in combination with other ACLs or ACL Groups on a given switch port.
ACLs can be grouped in the following manner:
„
Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACLs) allow you to classify packets according to a particular con-
tent in the packet header, such as the source address, destination address, source port num-
ber, destination port number, and others. Packet classifiers identify flows for more
processing.
The GbESM supports up to 384 ACLs. Each ACL defines one filter rule. Each filter rule is
a collection of matching criteria, and can include an action (permit or deny the packet).
For example:
ACL 1:
VLAN = 1
SIP = 10.10.10.1 (255.255.255.0)
Action = permit
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
Access Control Groups
An Access Control Group (ACL Group) is a collection of ACLs. For example:
ACL Group 1
ACL 1:
VLAN = 1
SIP = 10.10.10.1 (255.255.255.0)
Action = permit
ACL 2:
VLAN = 2
SIP = 10.10.10.2 (255.255.255.0)
Action = deny
ACL 3:
Priority = 7
DIP = 10.10.10.3 (255.255.255.0)
Action = permit
In the example above, each ACL defines a filter rule. ACL 3 has a higher precedence than
ACL 1, based on its number.
Use ACL Groups to create a traffic profile by gathering ACLs into an ACL Group, and
assigning the ACL Group to a port. The GbESM supports up to 384 ACL Groups.
ACL Metering and Re-marking
You can define a profile for the aggregate traffic flowing through the GbESM ports, by config-
uring a QoS meter (if desired), and assigning ACL Groups to ports. When you add ACL
Groups to a port, make sure they are ordered correctly in terms of precedence.
For example, consider two ACL Groups, ACL Group 1 and ACL Group 2. Each contains three
levels of precedence. If you add ACL Group 1 to a port, then add ACL Group 2 to the port, the
port’s ACL filters contain a total of six precedence levels. ACL Group 1 has precedence over
ACL Group 2.
Each port supports up to seven precedence levels.
Actions taken by an ACL are called In-Profile actions. You can configure additional In-Profile
and Out-of-Profile actions on a port. Data traffic can be metered, and re-marked to ensure that
the traffic flow provides certain levels of service in terms of bandwidth for different types of
network traffic.
130 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Metering
QoS metering provides different levels of service to data streams through user-configurable
parameters. A meter is used to measure the traffic stream against a traffic profile, which you
create. Thus, creating meters yields In-Profile and Out-of-Profile traffic for each ACL, as
follows:
„
In-Profile–If there is no meter configured or if the packet conforms to the meter, the
packet is classified as In-Profile.
„
Out-of-Profile–If a meter is configured and the packet does not conform to the meter
(exceeds the committed rate or maximum burst rate of the meter), the packet is classified
as Out-of-Profile.
Using meters, you set a Committed Rate in Kb/s (1000 bits per second in each Kb/s). All traffic
within this Committed Rate is In-Profile. Additionally, you set a Maximum Burst Size that
specifies an allowed data burst larger than the Committed Rate for a brief period. These param-
eters define the In-Profile traffic.
Meters keep the sorted packets within certain parameters. You can configure a meter on an
ACL, and perform actions on metered traffic, such as packet re-marking.
Re-Marking
Re-marking allows for the treatment of packets to be reset based on new network specifica-
tions or desired levels of service. You can configure the ACL to re-mark a packet as follows:
„
Change the DSCP value of a packet, used to specify the service level traffic should
receive.
„
Change the 802.1p priority of a packet.
Viewing ACL Statistics
ACL statistics display how many packets hit (matched) each ACL. Use ACL statistics to check
filter performance, and debug the ACL filters.
You must enable statistics (cfg/acl/acl x/stats ena) for each ACL that you want to
monitor.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
ACL Configuration Examples
Example 1
Use this configuration to block traffic to a specific host. All traffic that ingresses on port EXT1
is denied if it is destined for the host at IP address 100.10.1.1
1. Configure an Access Control List.
>> Main# cfg/acl/acl 1
(Define ACL 1)
>> ACL 1# ipv4/dip 100.10.1.1
Enter destination IP address mask (default 255.255.255.255):
>> Filtering IPv4# ..
>> ACL 1# action deny
2. Add ACL 1 to port EXT1.
>> Main# cfg/port ext1/aclqos
>> Port EXT1 ACL# /add acl 1
(Select port EXT 1 to assign ACLs)
(Assign ACL 1 to the port)
3. Apply and save the configuration.
>> Port EXT1 ACL# apply
>> Port EXT1 ACL# save
Example 2
Use this configuration to block traffic from a network destined for a specific host address. All
traffic that ingresses in port EXT2 with source IP from the class 100.10.1.0/24 and destination
IP 200.20.2.2 is denied.
1. Configure an Access Control List.
>> Main# cfg/acl/acl 2
(Define ACL 2)
>> ACL 2# ipv4/sip 100.10.1.0 255.255.255.0
>> Filtering IPv4# ipv4/dip 200.20.2.2 255.255.255.255
>> Filtering IPv4# ..
>> ACL 2# action deny
2. Add ACL 2 to port EXT2.
>> Main# cfg/port ext2/aclqos
>> Port EXT2 ACL# /add acl 2
(Select port EXT2 to assign ACLs)
(Assign ACL 2 to the port)
132 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Apply and save the configuration.
>> Port EXT2 ACL# apply
>> Port EXT2 ACL# save
Example 3
Use this configuration to block traffic from a network that is destined for a specific egress port.
All traffic that ingresses port EXT1 from the network 100.10.1.0/24 and is destined for port
INT1 is denied.
1. Configure an Access Control List.
>> Main# cfg/acl/acl 3
>> ACL 3# ipv4/sip 100.10.1.0 255.255.255.0
>> Filtering IPv4# ..
(Define ACL 3)
>> ACL 3# egrport int1
>> ACL 3# ..
>> ACL 3# action deny
2. Add ACL 3 to port EXT1.
>> Main# cfg/port ext1/aclqos
>> Port EXT1 ACL# /add acl 3
(Select port EXT1 to assign ACLs)
(Assign ACL 3 to the port)
3. Apply and save the configuration.
>> Port EXT2 ACL# apply
>> Port EXT2 ACL# save
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS
The six most significant bits in the TOS byte of the IP header are defined as DiffServ Code
Points (DSCP). Packets are marked with a certain value depending on the type of treatment the
packet must receive in the network device. DSCP is a measure of the Quality of Service (QoS)
level of the packet.
Differentiated Services Concepts
To differentiate between traffic flows, packets can be classified by their DSCP value. The Dif-
ferentiated Services (DS) field in the IP header is an octet, and the first six bits, called the DS
Code Point (DSCP), can provide QoS functions. Each packet carries its own QoS state in the
DSCP. There are 64 possible DSCP values (0-63).
Version
Length
ID
Offset TTL Proto FCS
SIP
DIP
Length
Data
ToS
unused
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Figure 7-2 Layer 3 IPv4 packet
The GbESM can perform the following actions to the DSCP:
„
„
„
Read the DSCP value of ingress packets
Re-mark the DSCP value to a new value
Map the DSCP value to an 802.1p priority
Once the DSCP value is marked, the GbESM can use it to direct traffic prioritization.
Per Hop Behavior
The DSCP value determines the Per Hop Behavior (PHB) of each packet. The PHB is the for-
warding treatment given to packets at each hop. QoS policies are built by applying a set of
rules to packets, based on the DSCP value, as they hop through the network.
134 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The GbESM default settings are based on the following standard PHBs, as defined in the IEEE
standards:
„
Expedited Forwarding (EF)—This PHB has the highest egress priority and lowest drop
precedence level. EF traffic is forwarded ahead of all other traffic. EF PHB is described in
RFC 2598.
„
Assured Forwarding (AF)—This PHB contains four service levels, each with a different
drop precedence, as shown below. Routers use drop precedence to determine which
packets to discard last when the network becomes congested. AF PHB is described in
RFC 2597.
Drop
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Precedence
Low
AF11 (DSCP 10) AF21 (DSCP 18) AF31 (DSCP 26) AF41 (DSCP 34)
AF12 (DSCP 12) AF22 (DSCP 20) AF32 (DSCP 28) AF42 (DSCP 36)
AF13 (DSCP 14) AF23 (DSCP 22) AF33 (DSCP 30) AF43 (DSCP 38)
Medium
High
„
Class Selector (CS)—This PHB has eight priority classes, with CS7 representing the high-
est priority, and CS0 representing the lowest priority, as shown below. CS PHB is
described in RFC 2474.
Priority
Class Selector
CS7
DSCP
56
48
40
32
24
16
8
Highest
CS6
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
Lowest
CS0
0
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
QoS Levels
Table 7-5 shows the default service levels provided by the GbESM, listed from highest to
lowest importance:
Table 7-5 Default QoS Service Levels
Service Level
Critical
Default PHB
802.1p Priority
CS7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Network Control
Premium
Platinum
Gold
CS6
EF, CS5
AF41, AF42, AF43, CS4
AF31, AF32, AF33, CS3
AF21, AF22, AF23, CS2
AF11, AF12, AF13, CS1
DF, CS0
Silver
Bronze
Standard
136 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
DSCP Re-marking and Mapping
The GbESM can re-mark the DSCP value of ingress packets to a new value, and set the
802.1p priority value, based on the DSCP value. You can view the default settings by using
the cfg/qos/dscp/curcommand, as shown below.
>> DSCP Remark# cur
Current DSCP Remarking Configuration: OFF
DSCP
New DSCP New 802.1p Prio
-------- -------- ---------------
0
1
0
1
0
0
...
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Use the cfg/qos/dscp/oncommand to turn on DSCP re-marking globally. Then you must
enable DSCP re-marking (cfg/port x/dscpmrk/ena) on any port that you wish to per-
form this function.
NOTE – If an ACL meter is configured for DSCP re-marking, the meter function takes prece-
dence over QoS re-marking.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
DSCP Re-marking Configuration Example
1. Turn DSCP re-marking on globally, and define the DSCP-DSCP-802.1p mapping. You
can use the default mapping, as shown in the cfg/qos/dscp/curcommand output.
>> Main# cfg/qos/dscp/on
>> DSCP Remark# dscp 8
(Turn on DSCP re-marking)
(Define DSCP re-marking)
Current DSCP remark (for DSCP 8): 8
Enter new DSCP remark (for DSCP 8) [0-63]: 10
>> DSCP Remark# prio
(Define DSCP-to-802.1p mapping)
Enter DSCP [0-63]: 10
Current prio (for DSCP 10): 1
Enter new prio (for DSCP 10) [0-7]: 2
>> DSCP Remark# apply
2. Enable DSCP re-marking on a port.
>> Main# cfg/port EXT1
(Select port)
>> Port EXT1# dscpmrk ena
Current DSCP remarking: disabled
(Enable DSCP re-marking)
New DSCP remarking:
enabled
>> Port EXT1# apply
138 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using 802.1p Priorities to Provide QoS
Alteon OS provides Quality of Service functions based on the priority bits in a packet’s VLAN
header. (The priority bits are defined by the 802.1p standard within the IEEE 802.1q VLAN
header.) The 802.1p bits, if present in the packet, specify the priority that should be given to
packets during forwarding. Packets with a numerically higher (non-zero) priority are given for-
warding preference over packets with lower priority bit value.
The IEEE 802.1p standard uses eight levels of priority (0-7). Priority 7 is assigned to highest
priority network traffic, such as OSPF or RIP routing table updates, priorities 5-6 are assigned
to delay-sensitive applications such as voice and video, and lower priorities are assigned to
standard applications. A value of 0 (zero) indicates a “best effort” traffic prioritization, and this
is the default when traffic priority has not been configured on your network. The GbESM can
filter packets based on the 802.1p values, and it can assign or overwrite the 802.1p value in the
packet.
DMAC SMAC Tag E Type
FCS
SFD
Data
Preamble
Priority
VLAN Identifier (VID)
7
6
5
4
3
2
Figure 7-3 Layer 2 802.1q/802.1p VLAN tagged packet
Ingress packets receive a priority value, as follows:
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
„
„
Tagged packets—GbESM reads the 802.1p priority in the VLAN tag.
Untagged packets—GbESM tags the packet and assigns an 802.1p priority, based on the
port’s default priority (/cfg/port x/8021ppri).
Egress packets are placed in a COS queue based on the priority value, and scheduled for trans-
mission based on the scheduling weight of the COS queue.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 7: Quality of Service „ 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
802.1p Configuration Example
1. Configure a port’s default 802.1p priority.
>> Main# cfg/port EXT1
>> Port EXT1# 8021ppri
Current 802.1p priority: 0
Enter new 802.1p priority [0-7]: 1
>> Port EXT1# ena
(Select port)
(Set port’s default 802.1p priority)
>> Port EXT1# apply
2. Map the 802.1p priority value to a COS queue and set the COS queue scheduling weight.
>> Main# cfg/qos/8021p
(Select 802.1p menu)
>> 802.1p# priq
(Set COS queue assignments)
Enter priority [0-7]: 1
Current COS queue (for priority 1): 0
Enter new COS queue (for priority 1) [0-1]: 1
>> 802.1p# qweight
(Set COS queue weights)
Enter COS queue [0-1]: 1
Current weight (for COS queue 1): 3
Enter new weight (for COS queue 1) [0-15]: 10
>> 802.1p# apply
Queuing and Scheduling
The GbESM has eight output Class of Service (COS) queues per port, into which each packet
is placed. Each packet’s 802.1p priority determines its COS queue, except when an ACL action
sets the COS queue of the packet.
Each COS queue uses Weighted Round Robin (WRR) scheduling, with user configurable
weight from 1 to 15. The weight of 0 (zero) indicates strict priority, which might starve the low
priority queues.
You can configure the following attributes for COS queues:
„
„
Map 802.1p priority value to a COS queue
Define the scheduling weight of each COS queue
Use the 802.1p menu (/cfg/qos/8021p) to configure COS queues.
140 „ Chapter 7: Quality of Service
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 2: IP Routing
This section discusses Layer 3 switching functions. In addition to switching traffic at near line
rates, the application switch can perform multi-protocol routing. This section discusses basic
routing and advanced routing protocols:
„
„
„
„
„
Basic Routing
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
142
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 8
ule to perform IP routing functions. The following topics are addressed in this chapter:
„
„
„
„
“IP Routing Benefits” on page 144
“Routing Between IP Subnets” on page 145
“Example of Subnet Routing” on page 148
“Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” on page 152
42C4911, January 2007
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IP Routing Benefits
The GbE Switch Module uses a combination of configurable IP switch interfaces and IP rout-
ing options. The switch IP routing capabilities provide the following benefits:
„
„
Connects the server IP subnets to the rest of the backbone network.
Provides another means to invisibly introduce Jumbo frame technology into the server-
switched network by automatically fragmenting UDP Jumbo frames when routing to non-
Jumbo frame VLANs or subnets.
„
Provides the ability to route IP traffic between multiple Virtual Local Area Networks
(VLANs) configured on the switch.
144 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Routing Between IP Subnets
The physical layout of most corporate networks has evolved over time. Classic hub/router
topologies have given way to faster switched topologies, particularly now that switches are
increasingly intelligent. GbE Switch Modules are intelligent and fast enough to perform rout-
ing functions on a par with wire speed Layer 2 switching.
The combination of faster routing and switching in a single device provides another service—
it allows you to build versatile topologies that account for legacy configurations.
For example, consider the following topology migration:
Internet
GbE
Internet
Switch
Module
BladeCenter
Figure 8-1 The Router Legacy Network
In this example, a corporate campus has migrated from a router-centric topology to a faster,
more powerful, switch-based topology. As is often the case, the legacy of network growth and
redesign has left the system with a mix of illogically distributed subnets.
This is a situation that switching alone cannot cure. Instead, the router is flooded with cross-
subnet communication. This compromises efficiency in two ways:
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing „ 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
„
Routers can be slower than switches. The cross-subnet side trip from the switch to the
router and back again adds two hops for the data, slowing throughput considerably.
Traffic to the router increases, increasing congestion.
Even if every end-station could be moved to better logical subnets (a daunting task), competi-
tion for access to common server pools on different subnets still burdens the routers.
This problem is solved by using GbE Switch Modules with built-in IP routing capabilities.
Cross-subnet LAN traffic can now be routed within the switches with wire speed Layer 2
switching performance. This not only eases the load on the router but saves the network
administrators from reconfiguring each and every end-station with new IP addresses.
Take a closer look at the BladeCenter’s GbE Switch Module in the following configuration
example:
10 Gbps
Ser ver Su b n et :
206.30.15.2-254
IF#3
IF#2
IF#4
GbESM
IF#1
10 Gbps
BladeCenter
Figure 8-2 Switch-Based Routing Topology
The GbE Switch Module connects the Gigabit Ethernet and Fast Ethernet trunks from various
switched subnets throughout one building. Common servers are placed on another subnet
attached to the switch. A primary and backup router are attached to the switch on yet another
subnet.
146 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Without Layer 3 IP routing on the switch, cross-subnet communication is relayed to the default
gateway (in this case, the router) for the next level of routing intelligence. The router fills in the
necessary address information and sends the data back to the switch, which then relays the
packet to the proper destination subnet using Layer 2 switching.
With Layer 3 IP routing in place on the GbE Switch Module, routing between different IP sub-
nets can be accomplished entirely within the switch. This leaves the routers free to handle
inbound and outbound traffic for this group of subnets.
To make implementation even easier, UDP Jumbo frame traffic is automatically fragmented to
regular Ethernet frame sizes when routing to non-Jumbo frame VLANS or subnets. This auto-
matic frame conversion allows servers to communicate using Jumbo frames, all transparently
to the user.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing „ 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Example of Subnet Routing
Prior to configuring, you must be connected to the switch Command Line Interface (CLI) as
the administrator.
example, see the Alteon OS Command Reference.
1. Assign an IP address (or document the existing one) for each router and client worksta-
tion.
In the example topology in Figure 8-2 on page 146, the following IP addresses are used:
Table 8-1 Subnet Routing Example: IP Address Assignments
Subnet
Devices
IP Addresses
1
2
3
4
Primary and Secondary Default Routers 205.21.17.1 and 205.21.17.2
First Floor Client Workstations
Second Floor Client Workstations
Common Servers
100.20.10.2-254
131.15.15.2-254
206.30.15.2-254
2. Assign an IP interface for each subnet attached to the switch.
Since there are four IP subnets connected to the switch, four IP interfaces are needed:
Table 8-2 Subnet Routing Example: IP Interface Assignments
Interface
IF 1
Devices
IP Interface Address
Primary and Secondary Default Routers 205.21.17.3
IF 2
First Floor Client Workstations
Second Floor Client Workstations
Common Servers
100.20.10.1
131.15.15.1
206.30.15.1
IF 3
IF 4
148 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IP interfaces are configured using the following commands at the CLI:
>> # /cfg/l3/if 1
(Select IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# addr 205.21.17.3
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Assign IP address for the interface)
(Enable IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# ../if 2
>> IP Interface 2# addr 100.20.10.1
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Select IP interface 2)
(Assign IP address for the interface)
(Enable IP interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# ../if 3
>> IP Interface 3# addr 131.15.15.1
>> IP Interface 3# ena
(Select IP interface 3)
(Assign IP address for the interface)
(Enable IP interface 3)
>> IP Interface 3# ../if 4
>> IP Interface 4# addr 206.30.15.1
>> IP Interface 4# ena
(Select IP interface 4)
(Assign IP address for the interface)
(Enable IP interface 5)
3. Set each server and workstation’s default gateway to the appropriate switch IP interface
(the one in the same subnet as the server or workstation).
4. Configure the default gateways to the routers’ addresses.
Configuring the default gateways allows the switch to send outbound traffic to the routers:
>> IP Interface 5# ../gw 1
>> Default gateway 1# addr 205.21.17.1
>> Default gateway 1# ena
>> Default gateway 1# ../gw 2
>> Default gateway 2# addr 205.21.17.2
>> Default gateway 2# ena
(Select primary default gateway)
(Assign IP address for primary router)
(Enable primary default gateway)
(Select secondary default gateway)
(Assign address for secondary router)
(Enable secondary default gateway)
5. Apply and verify the configuration.
>> Default gateway 2# # apply
>> Default gateway 2# /cfg/l3/cur
(Make your changes active)
(View current IP settings)
Examine the resulting information. If any settings are incorrect, make the appropriate changes.
6. Save your new configuration changes.
>> IP# save
(Save for restore after reboot)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing „ 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using VLANs to Segregate Broadcast Domains
In the previous example, devices that share a common IP network are all in the same broadcast
domain. If you want to limit the broadcasts on your network, you could use VLANs to create
distinct broadcast domains. For example, as shown in the following procedure, you could cre-
ate one VLAN for the client trunks, one for the routers, and one for the servers.
In this example, you are adding to the previous configuration.
1. Determine which switch ports and IP interfaces belong to which VLANs.
The following table adds port and VLAN information:
Table 8-3 Subnet Routing Example: Optional VLAN Ports
VLAN Devices
IP Interface Switch Port VLAN #
1
2
3
First Floor Client Workstations
2
3
1
1
4
4
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
INT5
INT6
1
1
2
2
3
3
Second Floor Client Workstations
Primary Default Router
Secondary Default Router
Common Servers 1
Common Servers 2
2. Add the switch ports to their respective VLANs.
The VLANs shown in Table 8-3 are configured as follows:
>> # /cfg/l2/vlan 1
>> VLAN 1# add port EXT1
>> VLAN 1# add port EXT2
>> VLAN 1# ena
(Select VLAN 1)
(Add port for 1st floor to VLAN 1)
(Add port for 2nd floor to VLAN 1)
(Enable VLAN 1)
>> VLAN 1# ../VLAN 2
>> VLAN 2# add port EXT3
>> VLAN 2# add port EXT4
>> VLAN 2# ena
(Select VLAN 2)
(Add port for default router 1)
(Add port for default router 2)
(Enable VLAN 2)
>> VLAN 2# ../VLAN 3
>> VLAN 3# add port INT5
>> VLAN 3# add port INT6
>> VLAN 3# ena
(Add port for default router 3)
(Select VLAN 3)
(Select port for common server 1)
(Enable VLAN 3)
150 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Each time you add a port to a VLAN, you may get the following prompt:
Port 4 is an untagged port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 2 [y/n]?
Enter yto set the default Port VLAN ID (PVID) for the port.
3. Add each IP interface to the appropriate VLAN.
Now that the ports are separated into three VLANs, the IP interface for each subnet must be
placed in the appropriate VLAN. From Table 8-3 on page 150, the settings are made as fol-
lows:
>> VLAN 3# /cfg/l3/if 1
>> IP Interface 1# vlan 2
>> IP Interface 1# ../if 2
>> IP Interface 2# vlan 1
>> IP Interface 2# ../if 3
>> IP Interface 3# vlan 1
>> IP Interface 3# ../if 4
>> IP Interface 4# vlan 3
(Select IP interface 1 for def. routers)
(Set to VLAN 2)
(Select IP interface 2 for first floor)
(Set to VLAN 1)
(Select IP interface 3 for second floor)
(Set to VLAN 1)
(Select IP interface 4 for servers)
(Set to VLAN 3)
4. Apply and verify the configuration.
>> IP Interface 5# apply
>> IP Interface 5# /info/vlan
>> Information# port
(Make your changes active)
(View current VLAN information)
(View current port information)
Examine the resulting information. If any settings are incorrect, make the appropriate changes.
5. Save your new configuration changes.
>> Information# save
(Save for restore after reboot)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing „ 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a transport protocol that provides a frame-
work for automatically assigning IP addresses and configuration information to other IP hosts
or clients in a large TCP/IP network. Without DHCP, the IP address must be entered manually
for each network device. DHCP allows a network administrator to distribute IP addresses from
a central point and automatically send a new IP address when a device is connected to a differ-
ent place in the network.
DHCP is an extension of another network IP management protocol, Bootstrap Protocol
(BOOTP), with an additional capability of being able to dynamically allocate reusable network
addresses and configuration parameters for client operation.
Built on the client/server model, DHCP allows hosts or clients on an IP network to obtain their
configurations from a DHCP server, thereby reducing network administration. The most sig-
nificant configuration the client receives from the server is its required IP address; (other
optional parameters include the “generic” file name to be booted, the address of the default
gateway, and so forth).
DHCP relay agent eliminates the need to have DHCP/BOOTP servers on every subnet. It
allows the administrator to reduce the number of DHCP servers deployed on the network and
to centralize them. Without the DHCP relay agent, there must be at least one DHCP server
deployed at each subnet that has hosts needing to perform the DHCP request.
152 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
DHCP Relay Agent
DHCP is described in RFC 2131, and the DHCP relay agent supported on GbE Switch Mod-
ules is described in RFC 1542. DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol. The client sends
messages to the server on port 67 and the server sends messages to the client on port 68.
DHCP defines the methods through which clients can be assigned an IP address for a finite
lease period and allowing reassignment of the IP address to another client later. Additionally,
DHCP provides the mechanism for a client to gather other IP configuration parameters it needs
to operate in the TCP/IP network.
In the DHCP environment, the GbE Switch Module acts as a relay agent. The DHCP relay fea-
ture (/cfg/l3/bootp) enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to
two BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the switch.
When a switch receives a UDP broadcast on port 67 from a DHCP client requesting an IP
address, the switch acts as a proxy for the client, replacing the client source IP (SIP) and desti-
nation IP (DIP) addresses. The request is then forwarded as a UDP Unicast MAC layer mes-
sage to two BOOTP servers whose IP addresses are configured on the switch. The servers
respond as a UDP Unicast message back to the switch, with the default gateway and IP address
for the client. The destination IP address in the server response represents the interface address
on the switch that received the client request. This interface address tells the switch on which
VLAN to send the server response to the client.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing „ 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
DHCP Relay Agent Configuration
To enable the GbE Switch Module to be the BOOTP forwarder, you need to configure the
DHCP/BOOTP server IP addresses on the switch. You generally configure the IP interface on
the client side to match the client’s subnet, and configure VLANs to separate client and server
subnets. The DHCP server knows from which IP subnet the newly allocated IP address should
come.
The following figure shows a basic DHCP network example:
GbESM
DHCP
Server
BladeCenter
Figure 8-3 DHCP Relay Agent Configuration
In GbE Switch Module implementation, there is no need for primary or secondary servers. The
client request is forwarded to the BOOTP servers configured on the switch. The use of two
servers provide failover redundancy. However, no health checking is supported.
Use the following commands to configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent:
>> # /cfg/l3/bootp
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# addr2
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# on
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# off
>> Bootstrap Protocol Relay# cur
(Set IP address of BOOTP server)
(Set IP address of 2nd BOOTP server)
(Globally turn BOOTP relay on)
(Globally turn BOOTP relay off)
(Display current configuration)
Additionally, DHCP Relay functionality can be assigned on a per interface basis. Use the fol-
lowing command to enable the Relay functionality:
>> # /cfg/l3/if <interface number>/relay ena
154 „ Chapter 8: Basic IP Routing
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 9
Routing Information Protocol
In a routed environment, routers communicate with one another to keep track of available
routes. Routers can learn about available routes dynamically using the Routing Information
Protocol (RIP). Alteon OS software supports RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2)
for exchanging TCP/IP route information with other routers.
Distance Vector Protocol
RIP is known as a distance vector protocol. The vector is the network number and next hop,
and the distance is the cost associated with the network number. RIP identifies network reach-
ability based on cost, and cost is defined as hop count. One hop is considered to be the distance
from one switch to the next which is typically 1. This cost or hop count is known as the metric.
When a switch receives a routing update that contains a new or changed destination network
entry, the switch adds 1 to the metric value indicated in the update and enters the network in
the routing table. The IP address of the sender is used as the next hop.
Stability
RIP includes a number of other stability features that are common to many routing protocols.
For example, RIP implements the split horizon and hold-down mechanisms to prevent incor-
rect routing information from being propagated.
RIP prevents routing loops from continuing indefinitely by implementing a limit on the num-
ber of hops allowed in a path from the source to a destination. The maximum number of hops
in a path is 15. The network destination network is considered unreachable if increasing the
metric value by 1 causes the metric to be 16 (that is infinity). This limits the maximum diame-
ter of a RIP network to less than 16 hops.
RIP is often used in stub networks and in small autonomous systems that do not have many
redundant paths.
42C4911, January 2007
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Routing Updates
RIP sends routing-update messages at regular intervals and when the network topology
changes. Each router “advertises” routing information by sending a routing information update
every 30 seconds. If a router doesn’t receive an update from another router for 180 seconds,
those routes provided by that router are declared invalid. After another 120 seconds without
receiving an update for those routes, the routes are removed from the routing table and respec-
tive regular updates.
When a router receives a routing update that includes changes to an entry, it updates its routing
table to reflect the new route. The metric value for the path is increased by 1, and the sender is
indicated as the next hop. RIP routers maintain only the best route (the route with the lowest
metric value) to a destination.
For more information see The Configuration Menu, Routing Information Protocol Configura-
tion (/cfg/l3/rip) in the Alteon OS Command Reference.
RIPv1
RIP version 1 use broadcast User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets for the regular rout-
ing updates. The main disadvantage is that the routing updates do not carry subnet mask infor-
mation. Hence, the router cannot determine whether the route is a subnet route or a host route.
It is of limited usage after the introduction of RIPv2. For more information about
RIPv1 and RIPv2, refer to RFC 1058 and RFC 2453.
RIPv2
RIPv2 is the most popular and preferred configuration for most networks. RIPv2 expands the
amount of useful information carried in RIP messages and provides a measure of security. For
a detailed explanation of RIPv2, refer to RFC 1723 and RFC 2453.
RIPv2 improves efficiency by using multicast UDP (address 224.0.0.9) data packets for regu-
lar routing updates. Subnet mask information is provided in the routing updates. A security
option is added for authenticating routing updates, by using a shared password. Alteon OS sup-
ports using clear password for RIPv2.
156 „ Chapter 9: Routing Information Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
RIPv2 in RIPv1 compatibility mode
Alteon OS allows you to configure RIPv2 in RIPv1compatibility mode, for using both RIPv2
and RIPv1 routers within a network. In this mode, the regular routing updates use broadcast
UDP data packet to allow RIPv1 routers to receive those packets. With RIPv1 routers as recip-
ients, the routing updates have to carry natural or host mask. Hence, it is not a recommended
configuration for most network topologies.
NOTE – When using both RIPv1 and RIPv2 within a network, use a single subnet mask
throughout the network.
RIP Features
Alteon OS provides the following features to support RIPv1 and RIPv2:
Poison
Simple split horizon in RIP scheme omits routes learned from one neighbor in updates sent to
that neighbor. That is the most common configuration used in RIP, that is setting this Poison to
DISABLE. Split horizon with poisoned reverse includes such routes in updates, but sets their
metrics to 16. The disadvantage of using this feature is the increase of size in the routing
updates.
Triggered updates
Triggered updates are an attempt to speed up convergence. When Triggered Updates is enabled
(/cfg/l3/rip/if x/trigg/e), whenever a router changes the metric for a route, it
sends update messages almost immediately, without waiting for the regular update interval. It
is recommended to enable Triggered Updates.
Multicast
RIPv2 messages use IP multicast address (224.0.0.9) for periodic broadcasts. Multicast RIPv2
announcements are not processed by RIPv1 routers. IGMP is not needed since these are inter-
router messages which are not forwarded.
To configure RIPv2 in RIPv1 compatibility mode, set multicast to disable, and set version
to both.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 9: Routing Information Protocol „ 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Default
The RIP router can listen and supply a default route, usually represented as 0.0.0.0 in the rout-
ing table. When a router does not have an explicit route to a destination network in its routing
table, it uses the default route to forward those packets.
Metric
The metric field contains a configurable value between 1 and 15 (inclusive) which specifies the
current metric for the interface. The metric value typically indicates the total number of hops to
the destination. The metric value of 16 represents an unreachable destination.
Authentication
RIPv2 authentication uses plaintext password for authentication. If configured using Authenti-
cation password, then it is necessary to enter an authentication key value.
The following method is used to authenticate a RIP message:
„
If the router is not configured to authenticate RIPv2 messages, then RIPv1 and unauthenti-
cated RIPv2 messages are accepted; authenticated RIPv2 messages are discarded.
„
If the router is configured to authenticate RIPv2 messages, then RIPv1 messages and
RIPv2 messages which pass authentication testing are accepted; unauthenticated and
failed authentication RIPv2 messages are discarded.
For maximum security, RIPv1 messages are ignored when authentication is enabled
(cfg/l3/rip/if x/auth/password); otherwise, the routing information from authen-
ticated messages is propagated by RIPv1 routers in an unauthenticated manner.
RIP Configuration Example
NOTE – An interface RIP disabled uses all the default values of the RIP, no matter how the
RIP parameters are configured for that interface. RIP sends out RIP regular updates to include
an UP interface, but not a DOWN interface.
158 „ Chapter 9: Routing Information Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
1. Add VLANs for routing interfaces.
>> Main# cfg/l2/vlan 2/ena
>> VLAN 2# add ext2
(Enable VLAN 2)
(Add port EXT2 to VLAN 2)
Port EXT2 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 2 [y/n]: y
>> VLAN 2# /cfg/l2/vlan 3/ena
(Enable VLAN 3)
>> VLAN 3# add ext3
(Add port EXT3 to VLAN 3)
Port EXT3 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 3 [y/n]: y
2. Add IP interfaces to VLANs.
>> Main# cfg/l3/if 2/ena
(Enable interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# addr 102.1.1.1
>> IP Interface 2# vlan 2
>> IP Interface 2# /cfg/l3/if 3/ena
>> IP Interface 3# addr 103.1.1.1
>> IP Interface 3# vlan 3
(Define IP address for interface 2)
(Add interface 2 to VLAN 2)
(Enable interface 3)
(Define IP address for interface 3)
(Add interface 3 to VLAN 3)
3. Turn on RIP globally and enable RIP for each interface.
>> Main# cfg/l3/rip on
(Turn on RIP globally)
>> Routing Information Protocol# if 2/ena (Enable RIP on IP interface 2)
>> RIP Interface 2# ..
>> Routing Information Protocol# if 3/ena (Enable RIP on IP interface 3)
>> RIP Interface 3# apply
(Apply your changes)
>> RIP Interface 3# save
(Save the configuration)
Use the /maint/route/dumpcommand to check the current valid routes in the routing
table of the switch.
For those RIP learnt routes within the garbage collection period, that are routes phasing out of
the routing table with metric 16, use the /info/l3/rip/routescommand. Locally con-
figured static routes do not appear in the RIP Routes table.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 9: Routing Information Protocol „ 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
160 „ Chapter 9: Routing Information Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 10
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used by IP Multicast routers to learn about the
existence of host group members on their directly attached subnet (see RFC 2236). The IP
Multicast routers get this information by broadcasting IGMP Membership Queries and listen-
ing for IP hosts reporting their host group memberships. This process is used to set up a client/
ents that want to receive the data.
The GbESM can perform IGMP Snooping, or act as an IGMP Relay (proxy) device.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
„
„
„
“IGMP Snooping” on page 162
“IGMP Relay” on page 165
“Additional IGMP Features” on page 168
42C4911, January 2007
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request
it. IGMP Snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. The switch learns
which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic, and forwards it only to ports
connected to those servers.
IGMP Snooping conserves bandwidth. With IGMP Snooping, the switch learns which ports
are interested in receiving multicast data, and forwards multicast data only to those ports. In
this way, other ports are not burdened with unwanted multicast traffic.
The switch can sense IGMP Membership Reports from attached clients and act as a proxy to
set up a dedicated path between the requesting host and a local IP Multicast router. After the
pathway is established, the switch blocks the IP Multicast stream from flowing through any
port that does not connect to a host member, thus conserving bandwidth.
The client-server path is set up as follows:
„
„
„
„
An IP Multicast Router (Mrouter) sends Membership Queries to the switch, which for-
wards them to all ports in a given VLAN.
Hosts that want to receive the multicast data stream send Membership Reports to the
switch, which sends a proxy Membership Report to the Mrouter.
The switch sets up a path between the Mrouter and the host, and blocks all other ports
from receiving the multicast.
Periodically, the Mrouter sends Membership Queries to ensure that the host wants to con-
tinue receiving the multicast. If a host fails to respond with a Membership Report, the
Mrouter stops sending the multicast to that path.
„
The host can send a Leave Report to the switch, which sends a proxy Leave Report to the
Mrouter. The multicast path is terminated immediately.
162 „ Chapter 10: IGMP
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IGMP Snooping Configuration Example
This section provides steps to configure IGMP Snooping on the GbESM, using the Command-
Line Interface (CLI).
Configure IGMP Snooping
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Turn on IGMP.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/on
(Turn on IGMP)
3. Add VLANs to IGMP Snooping and enable the feature.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop
>> IGMP Snoop# add 1
>> IGMP Snoop# ena
(Access IGMP Snoop menu)
(Add VLAN 1 to IGMP snooping)
(Enable IGMP Snooping)
4. Apply and save the configuration.
>> IGMP Snoop# apply
>> IGMP Snoop# save
(Apply the configuration)
(Save your changes)
5. View dynamic IGMP information.
>> /info/l3/igmp
>> IGMP Multicast Group# dump
(Select IGMP information menu)
(Show IGMP Group information)
>> IGMP Multicast# dump
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped and will not appear.
Group VLAN Port Version Expires
--------------- ------ ------- -------- ----------
238.1.0.0
238.1.0.4
1
1
EXT1
EXT1
V2
V2
4:17
4:18
>> /info/l3/igmp/mrouter
>> Mrouter# dump
(Select Mrouter information menu)
(Show IGMP Group information)
>> IGMP Multicast Router# dump
VLAN
Port
Version
Expires
Max Query Resp. Time
-------
-------
--------- -------- -----------------------
1
EXT4
V2 static unknown
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 10: IGMP „ 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
These commands display information about IGMP Groups and Mrouters learned through
IGMP Snooping.
Static Multicast Router
A static multicast router (Mrouter) can be configured for a particular port on a particular
VLAN. A static Mrouter does not have to be learned through IGMP Snooping.
A total of 16 static Mrouters can be configured on the GbESM. Both internal and external ports
can accept a static Mrouter.
When you configure a static Mrouter on a VLAN, it replaces any dynamic Mrouters learned
through IGMP Snooping.
Configure a Static Multicast Router
1. Configure a port to which the static Multicast Router is connected, and enter the appro-
priate VLAN.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter
>> Static Multicast Router# add EXT4
Enter VLAN number: (1-4093) 1
(Select IGMP Mrouter menu)
(Add port EXT4 as Static Mrouter port)
(Enter the VLAN number)
Enter the version number of mrouter [1|2]: 2 (Enter the IGMP version number)
2. Apply, verify, and save the configuration.
>> Static Multicast Router# apply
>> Static Multicast Router# cur
>> Static Multicast Router# save
(Apply the configuration)
(View the configuration)
(Save your changes)
164 „ Chapter 10: IGMP
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IGMP Relay
The GbESM can act as an IGMP Relay (or IGMP Proxy) device that relays IGMP multicast
messages and traffic between an Mrouter and end stations. IGMP Relay allows the GbESM to
participate in network multicasts with no configuration of the various multicast routing proto-
cols, so you can deploy it in the network with minimal effort.
To an IGMP host connected to the GbESM, IGMP Relay appears to be an IGMP multicast
router (Mrouter). IGMP Relay sends Membership Queries to hosts, which respond by sending
an IGMP response message. A host can also send an unsolicited Join message to the IGMP
Relay.
To a multicast router, IGMP Relay appears as a host. The Mrouter sends IGMP host queries to
IGMP Relay, and IGMP Relay responds by forwarding IGMP host reports and unsolicited join
messages from its attached hosts.
IGMP Relay also forwards multicast traffic between the Mrouter and end stations, similar
to IGMP Snooping.
You can configure up to two Mrouters to use with IGMP Relay. One Mrouter acts as the pri-
mary Mrouter, and one is the backup Mrouter. The GbESM uses health checks to select the pri-
mary Mrouter.
Configuration Guidelines
Consider the following guidelines when you configure IGMP Relay:
„
„
IGMP Relay and IGMP Snooping are mutually exclusive—if you enable IGMP Relay,
you must turn off IGMP Snooping.
Upstream Mrouters must be connected to external ports (EXT 1 - EXT 6).
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 10: IGMP „ 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configure IGMP Relay
Use the following procedure to configure IGMP Relay.
1. Configure an IP interface and assign VLANs.
>> /cfg/l3/if 2
(Select IP interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# addr 10.10.1.1
>> IP Interface 2# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 2# vlan 2
(Configure IP address for IF 2)
(Configure mask for IF 2)
(Assign VLAN 2 to IF 2)
(Select IP interface 3)
>> /cfg/l3/if 3
>> IP Interface 3# addr 10.10.1.2
>> IP Interface 3# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 3# vlan 3
(Configure IP address for IF 3)
(Configure mask for IF 3)
(Assign VLAN 3 to IF 3)
2. Turn IGMP on.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/on
(Turn on IGMP)
3. Enable IGMP Relay and add VLANs to the downstream network.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/relay/ena
>> IGMP Relay# add 2
Vlan 2 added.
(Enable IGMP Relay)
(Add VLAN 2 to IGMP Relay)
>> IGMP Relay# add 3
Vlan 3 added.
(Add VLAN 3 to IGMP Relay)
4. Configure the upstream Mrouters.
>> IGMP Relay# mrtr 1/addr 100.0.1.2/ena
Current IP address:
0.0.0.0
New pending IP address: 100.0.1.2
Current status: disabled
New status:
enabled
>> Multicast router 1# ..
>> IGMP Relay# mrtr 2/addr 100.0.2.4/ena
Current IP address:
0.0.0.0
New pending IP address: 100.0.2.4
Current status: disabled
New status:
enabled
166 „ Chapter 10: IGMP
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
5. Apply and save the configuration.
>> Multicast router 2# apply
>> Multicast router 2# save
(Apply the configuration)
(Save the configuration)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 10: IGMP „ 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The following topics are discussed in this section:
„
„
“FastLeave” on page 168
“IGMP Filtering” on page 168
FastLeave
In normal IGMP operation, when the receives an IGMPv2 leave message, it sends a Group-
Specific Query to determine if any other devices in the same group (and on the same port) are
still interested in the specified multicast group traffic. The switch removes the affiliated port
from that particular group, if the following conditions apply:
„
If the switch does not receive an IGMP Membership Report within the query-response-
interval.
„
If no multicast routers have been learned on that port.
With FastLeave enabled on the VLAN, a port can be removed immediately from the port list of
the group entry when the IGMP Leave message is received, unless a multicast router was
learned on the port.
Enable FastLeave only on VLANs that have only one host connected to each physical port.
IGMP Filtering
With IGMP Filtering, you can allow or deny a port to send and receive multicast traffic to cer-
tain multicast groups. Unauthorized users are restricted from streaming multicast traffic across
the network.
If access to a multicast group is denied, IGMP Membership Reports from the port are dropped,
and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group. If access to the mul-
ticast group is allowed, Membership Reports from the port are forwarded for normal process-
ing.
To configure IGMP Filtering, you must globally enable IGMP filtering, define an IGMP filter,
assign the filter to a port, and enable IGMP Filtering on the port. To define an IGMP filter, you
must configure a range of IP multicast groups, choose whether the filter will allow or deny
multicast traffic for groups within the range, and enable the filter.
Configuring the Range
168 „ Chapter 10: IGMP
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Each IGMP Filter allows you to set a start and end point that defines the range of IP addresses
upon which the filter takes action. Each IP address in the range must be between 224.0.1.0 and
239.255.255.255. If you choose anyas the start point, then the filter acts upon all addresses
between 224.0.0.0 and the address entered as the end point. If you enter anyas the end point,
then the filter acts upon all addresses between the address entered as the start point and
239.255.255.255.
Configuring the Action
Each IGMP filter can allow or deny IP multicasts to the range of IP addresses configured. If
you configure the filter to deny IP multicasts, then IGMP Membership Reports from multicast
groups within the range are dropped. You can configure a secondary filter to allow IP multi-
casts to a small range of addresses within a larger range that a primary filter is configured to
deny. The two filters work together to allow IP multicasts to a small subset of addresses within
the larger range of addresses.
Configure IGMP Filtering
1. Enable IGMP Filtering on the switch.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt
>> IGMP Filter# ena
(Select IGMP Filtering menu)
(Enable IGMP Filtering)
Current status: disabled
New status:
enabled
2. Define an IGMP filter.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt
>>IGMP Filter# filter 1
(Select IGMP Filtering menu)
(Select Filter 1 Definition menu)
>>IGMP Filter 1 Definition# range 224.0.1.0 (Enter first IP address of the range)
Current multicast address2: any
Enter new multicast address2 or any: 226.0.0.0 (Enter second IP address)
Current multicast address1:
New pending multicast address1: 224.0.1.0
Current multicast address2: any
any
New pending multicast address2: 226.0.0.0
>>IGMP Filter 1 Definition# action deny
>>IGMP Filter 1 Definition# ena
(Deny multicast traffic)
(Enable the filter)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 10: IGMP „ 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Assign the IGMP filter to a port.
>> /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt
>>IGMP Filter# port EXT3
(Select IGMP Filtering menu)
(Select port EXT3)
>>IGMP Port EXT3# filt ena
Current port EXT3 filtering: disabled
(Enable IGMP Filtering on the port)
New port EXT3 filtering:
>>IGMP Port EXT3# add 1
>>IGMP Port EXT3# apply
enabled
(Add IGMP Filter 1 to the port)
(Make your changes active)
170 „ Chapter 10: IGMP
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 11
Border Gateway Protocol
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to
share and advertise routing information with each other about the segments of the IP address
space they can access within their network and with routers on external networks. BGP allows
you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination
on another network rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your
upstream provider(s). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
“What is a Route Map?” on page 174
“Redistributing Routes” on page 179
“BGP Attributes” on page 180
“Selecting Route Paths in BGP” on page 181
“BGP Failover Configuration” on page 182
“Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation Example” on page 185
42C4911, January 2007
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Internal Routing Versus External Routing
To ensure effective processing of network traffic, every router on your network needs to know
how to send a packet (directly or indirectly) to any other location/destination in your network.
This is referred to as internal routing and can be done with static routes or using active, inter-
nal dynamic routing protocols, such as RIP, RIPv2, and OSPF.
Static routes should have a higher degree of precedence than dynamic routing protocols. If the
destination route is not in the route cache, then the packets are forwarded to the default gate-
way which may be incorrect if a dynamic routing protocol is enabled.
It is also useful to tell routers outside your network (upstream providers or peers) about the
routes you can access in your network. External networks (those outside your own) that are
under the same administrative control are referred to as autonomous systems (AS). Sharing of
routing information between autonomous systems is known as external routing.
External BGP (eBGP) is used to exchange routes between different autonomous systems
whereas internal BGP (iBGP) is used to exchange routes within the same autonomous system.
An iBGP is a type of internal routing protocol you can use to do active routing inside your net-
work. It also carries AS path information, which is important when you are an ISP or doing
BGP transit.
NOTE – The iBGP peers must be part of a fully meshed network, as shown in Figure 11-1.
BladeCenter
Internet
Figure 11-1 iBGP and eBGP
172 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Typically, an AS has one or more border routers—peer routers that exchange routes with other
ASs—and an internal routing scheme that enables routers in that AS to reach every other router
and destination within that AS. When you advertise routes to border routers on other autono-
mous systems, you are effectively committing to carry data to the IP space represented in the
route being advertised. For example, if you advertise 192.204.4.0/24, you are declaring that if
another router sends you data destined for any address in 192.204.4.0/24, you know how to
carry that data to its destination.
Forming BGP Peer Routers
Two BGP routers become peers or neighbors once you establish a TCP connection between
them. For each new route, if a peer is interested in that route (for example, if a peer would like
to receive your static routes and the new route is static), an update message is sent to that peer
containing the new route. For each route removed from the route table, if the route has already
been sent to a peer, an update message containing the route to withdraw is sent to that peer.
For each Internet host, you must be able to send a packet to that host, and that host has to have a
path back to you. This means that whoever provides Internet connectivity to that host must have
a path to you. Ultimately, this means that they must “hear a route” which covers the section of the
IP space you are using; otherwise, you will not have connectivity to the host in question.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
What is a Route Map?
A route map is used to control and modify routing information. Route maps define conditions
for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another or controlling routing informa-
tion when injecting it in and out of BGP. Route maps are used by OSPF only for redistributing
routes. For example, a route map is used to set a preference value for a specific route from a
peer router and another preference value for all other routes learned via the same peer router.
For example, the following command is used to define a route map:
>> # /cfg/l3/rmap 1
(Select a route map)
It also allows users to overwrite the local preference metric and to append the AS number in
the AS route. See “BGP Failover Configuration” on page 182.
Alteon OS allows you to configure 32 route maps. Each route map can have up to eight access
lists. Each access list consists of a network filter. A network filter defines an IP address and
subnet mask of the network that you want to include in the filter. Figure 11-2 illustrates the
relationship between route maps, access lists and network filters.
174 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Route Maps
(rmap)
Network Filter
(nwf)
Access Lists
(alist)
1
1
---
---
---
Route Map 1
Route Map 2
8
8
9
1
---
---
---
8
16
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
1
249
256
---
---
---
Route Map 32
8
Figure 11-2 Distributing Network Filters in Access Lists and Route Maps
Incoming and Outgoing Route Maps
You can have two types of route maps: incoming and outgoing. A BGP peer router can be con-
figured to support up to eight route maps in the incoming route map list and outgoing route
map list.
If a route map is not configured in the incoming route map list, the router imports all BGP
updates. If a route map is configured in the incoming route map list, the router ignores all
unmatched incoming updates. If you set the action to deny, you must add another route map to
permit all unmatched updates.
Route maps in an outgoing route map list behave similar to route maps in an incoming route
map list. If a route map is not configured in the outgoing route map list, all routes are adver-
tised or permitted. If a route map in the outgoing route map list is set to permit, matched
routes are advertised and unmatched routes are ignored.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Precedence
You can set a priority to a route map by specifying a precedence value with the following
command:
>> /cfg/l3/rmap <x>/pre
(Specify a precedence)
The smaller the value the higher the precedence. If two route maps have the same precedence
value, the smaller number has higher precedence.
Configuration Overview
To configure route maps, you need to do the following:
1. Define network filter.
>> # /cfg/l3/nwf 1
(Specify a network filter number)
>> IP Network Filter 1# addr <IP address> (Specify network address)
>> IP Network Filter 1# mask <IP mask>
>> IP Network Filter 1# ena
(Specify network mask)
(Enable network filter)
Enter a filter number from 1 to 256. Specify the IP address and subnet mask of the network that
you want to match. Enable the network filter. You can distribute up to 256 network filters
among 32 route maps each containing eight access lists.
2. (Optional) Define the criteria for the access list and enable it.
Specify the access list and associate the network filter number configured in Step 1.
>> # /cfg/l3/rmap 1
(Specify a route map number)
(Specify the access list number)
(Specify the network filter number)
(Define a metric)
(Specify action for the access list)
(Enable the access list)
>> IP Route Map 1# alist 1
>> IP Access List 1# nwf 1
>> IP Access List 1# metric
>> IP Access List 1# action deny
>> IP Access List 1# ena
Steps 2 and 3 are optional, depending on the criteria that you want to match. In Step 2, the net-
work filter number is used to match the subnets defined in the network filter. In Step 3, the
autonomous system number is used to match the subnets. Or, you can use both (Step 2 and Step
3) criteria: access list (network filter) and access path (AS filter) to configure the route maps.
176 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. (Optional) Configure the attributes in the AS filter menu.
>> # cfg/l3/rmap 1/aspath 1
>> AS Filter 1# as 1
(Specify the attributes in the filter)
(Specify the AS number)
>> AS Filter 1# action deny
>> AS Filter 1# ena
(Specify the action for the filter)
(Enable the AS filter)
4. Set up the BGP attributes.
If you want to overwrite the attributes that the peer router is sending, then define the following
BGP attributes:
„
Specify the AS numbers that you want to prepend to a matched route and the local prefer-
ence for the matched route.
„
Specify the metric [Multi Exit Discriminator (MED)] for the matched route.
>> # cfg/l3/rmap 1
(Specify a route map number)
(Specify the AS numbers to prepend)
(Specify the local preference)
(Specify the metric)
>> IP Route Map 1# ap
>> IP Route Map 1# lp
>> IP Route Map 1# met
5. Enable the route map.
>> # cfg/l3/rmap 1/en
(Enable the route map)
6. Assign the route map to a peer router.
Select the peer router and then add the route map to the incoming route map list,
>> # cfg/l3/bgp/peer 1/addi
(Add to the incoming route map)
or to the outgoing route map list.
>> # cfg/l3/bgp/peer 1/addo
(Add to the outgoing route map)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Aggregating Routes
Aggregation is the process of combining several different routes in such a way that a single
route can be advertised, which minimizes the size of the routing table. You can configure
aggregate routes in BGP either by redistributing an aggregate route into BGP or by creating an
aggregate entry in the BGP routing table.
When a subnet is redistributed from an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) into BGP, only the
network route is injected into the BGP table. By default, this automatic summarization is dis-
abled. To define the route to aggregate, use the following commands:
>> # cfg/l3/bgp
(Specify BGP)
>> BGP aggr 1 # addr
>> BGP aggr 1 # mask
>> BGP aggr 1 # ena
(Specify aggregate list number)
(Enter aggregation network address)
(Enter aggregation network mask)
(Enable aggregation)
An example of creating a BGP aggregate route is shown in “Default Redistribution and Route
Aggregation Example” on page 185.
178 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Redistributing Routes
In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously, Alteon OS software can
the switch to use BGP to readvertise static routes. This applies to all of the IP-based routing
protocols.
You can also conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing domains by
defining a method known as route maps between the two domains. For more information on
route maps, see “What is a Route Map?” on page 174. Redistributing routes is another way of
providing policy control over whether to export OSPF routes, fixed routes, static routes, and
virtual IP address routes. For an example configuration, see “Default Redistribution and Route
Aggregation Example” on page 185.
Default routes can be configured using the following methods:
„
„
Import
Originate—The router sends a default route to peers if it does not have any default routes
in its routing table.
„
Redistribute—Default routes are either configured through the default gateway or learned
via other protocols and redistributed to peer routers. If the default routes are from the
default gateway, enable the static routes because default routes from the default gateway
are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from another routing protocol, make
sure you enable that protocol for redistribution.
„
None
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
BGP Attributes
The following two BGP attributes are discussed in this section: Local preference and metric
(Multi-Exit Discriminator).
Local Preference Attribute
When there are multiple paths to the same destination, the local preference attribute indicates
the preferred path. The path with the higher preference is preferred (the default value of the
local preference attribute is 100). Unlike the weight attribute, which is only relevant to the
local router, the local preference attribute is part of the routing update and is exchanged among
routers in the same AS.
The local preference attribute can be set in one of two ways:
„ /cfg/l3/bgp/pref
This command uses the BGP default local preference method, affecting the outbound
direction only.
„ /cfg/l3/rmap/lp
This command uses the route map local preference method, which affects both inbound
and outbound directions.
Metric (Multi-Exit Discriminator) Attribute
This attribute is a hint to external neighbors about the preferred path into an AS when there are
multiple entry points. A lower metric value is preferred over a higher metric value. The default
value of the metric attribute is 0.
Unlike local preference, the metric attribute is exchanged between ASs; however, a metric
attribute that comes into an AS does not leave the AS.
When an update enters the AS with a certain metric value, that value is used for decision mak-
ing within the AS. When BGP sends that update to another AS, the metric is reset to 0.
Unless otherwise specified, the router compares metric attributes for paths from external
neighbors that are in the same AS.
180 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Selecting Route Paths in BGP
BGP selects only one path as the best path. It does not rely on metrics attributes to determine
the best path. When the same network is learned via more than one BGP peer, BGP uses its
policy for selecting the best route to that network. The BGP implementation on the GbE
Switch Module uses the following criteria to select a path when the same route is received
from multiple peers.
1. Local fixed and static routes are preferred over learned routes.
2. With iBGP peers, routes with higher local preference values are selected.
3. In the case of multiple routes of equal preference, the route with lower AS path weight is
selected.
AS path weight = 128 x AS path length (number of autonomous systems transversed).
4. In the case of equal weight and routes learned from peers that reside in the same AS, the
lower metric is selected.
NOTE – A route with a metric is preferred over a route without a metric.
5. The lower cost to the next hop of routes is selected.
6. In the case of equal cost, the eBGP route is preferred over iBGP.
7. If all routes are from eBGP, the route with the lower router ID is selected.
When the path is selected, BGP puts the selected path in its routing table and propagates the
path to its neighbors.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Use the following example to create redundant default gateways for a GbE Switch Module at a
Web Host/ISP site, eliminating the possibility, should one gateway go down, that requests will
be forwarded to an upstream router unknown to the switch.
As shown in Figure 11-3, the switch is connected to ISP 1 and ISP 2. The customer negotiates
with both ISPs to allow the switch to use their peer routers as default gateways. The ISP peer
routers will then need to announce themselves as default gateways to the GbE Switch Module.
GbE Switch
Module
VIP: 200.200.200.200
IP: 200.200.200.1
IP: 210.210.210.1
BladeCenter
Server 2
Server 1
IP: 200.200.200.10
IP: 200.200.200.11
Figure 11-3 BGP Failover Configuration Example
On the GbE Switch Module, one peer router (the secondary one) is configured with a longer
AS path than the other, so that the peer with the shorter AS path will be seen by the switch as
the primary default gateway. ISP 2, the secondary peer, is configured with a metric of “3,”
thereby appearing to the switch to be three router hops away.
182 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
1. Define the VLANs.
For simplicity, both default gateways are configured in the same VLAN in this example. The
gateways could be in the same VLAN or different VLANs.
>> # /cfg/l2/vlan 1
(Select VLAN 1)
>> vlan 1# add <port number>
(Add a port to the VLAN membership)
2. Define the IP interfaces.
The switch will need an IP interface for each default gateway to which it will be connected.
Each interface will need to be placed in the appropriate VLAN. These interfaces will be used
as the primary and secondary default gateways for the switch.
>> IP# metrc strict
>> IP# if 1
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Set metric for default gateway)
(Select default gateway interface 1)
(Enable switch interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# addr 200.200.200.1
>> IP Interface 1# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 1# ../ip/if 2
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Configure IP address of interface 1)
(Configure IP subnet address mask)
(Select default gateway interface 2)
(Enable switch interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# addr 210.210.210.1
>> IP Interface 2# mask 255.255.255.0
(Configure IP address of interface 2)
(Configure IP subnet address mask)
3. Enable IP forwarding.
IP forwarding is turned on by default and is used for VLAN-to-VLAN (non-BGP) routing.
Make sure IP forwarding is on if the default gateways are on different subnets or if the switch
is connected to different subnets and those subnets need to communicate through the switch
(which they almost always do).
>> /cfg/l3/frwd on
(Enable IP forwarding)
NOTE – To help eliminate the possibility for a Denial of Service (DoS) attack, the forwarding of
directed broadcasts is disabled by default.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
4. Configure BGP peer router 1 and 2.
Peer 1 is the primary gateway router. Peer 2 is configured with a metric of “3.” The metric
option is key to ensuring gateway traffic is directed to Peer 1, as it will make Peer 2 appear to
be three router hops away from the switch. Thus, the switch should never use it unless Peer 1
goes down.
>> # /cfg/l3/bgp/peer 1
(Select BGP peer router 1)
>> BGP Peer 1# ena
(Enable this peer configuration)
(Set IP address for peer router 1)
(Set IP interface for peer router 1)
(Set remote AS number)
>> BGP Peer 1# addr 200.200.200.2
>> BGP Peer 1# if 200.200.200.1
>> BGP Peer 1# ras 100
>> BGP Peer 1# /cfg/l3/bgp/peer 2
>> BGP Peer 2# ena
>> BGP Peer 2# addr 210.210.210.2
>> BGP Peer 2# if 210.210.210.1
>> BGP Peer 2# ras 200
(Select BGP peer router 2)
(Enable this peer configuration)
(Set IP address for peer router 2)
(Set IP interface for peer router 2)
(Set remote AS number)
>> BGP Peer 2# metric 3
(Set AS path length to 3 router hops)
The metric command in the peer menu tells the GbE Switch Module to create an AS path of
“3” when advertising via BGP.
5. On the switch, apply and save your configuration changes.
>> BGP Peer 2# apply
>> save
(Make your changes active)
(Save for restore after reboot)
184 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation
Example
This example shows you how to configure the switch to redistribute information from one
routing protocol to another and create an aggregate route entry in the BGP routing table to min-
imize the size of the routing table.
As illustrated in Figure 11-4, you have two peer routers: an internal and an external peer router.
Configure the GbE Switch Module to redistribute the default routes from AS 200 to AS 135.
At the same time, configure for route aggregation to allow you to condense the number of
routes traversing from AS 135 to AS 200.
GbE
Switch Module
10.1.1.135
BladeCenter
Figure 11-4 Route Aggregation and Default Route Redistribution
1. Configure the IP interface.
2. Configure the AS number (AS 135) and router ID number (10.1.1.135).
>> # /cfg/l3/bgp
(Select BGP menu)
>> Border Gateway Protocol# as 135
(Specify an AS number)
>> Border Gateway Protocol# .. /rtrid 10.1.1.135(Specify a router ID number)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol „ 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Configure internal peer router 1 and external peer router 2.
>> # /cfg/l3/bgp/peer 1
>> BGP Peer 1# ena
>> BGP Peer 1# addr 10.1.1.4
>> BGP Peer 1# ras 135
>> BGP Peer 1# ../peer 2
>> BGP Peer 2# ena
(Select internal peer router 1)
(Enable this peer configuration)
(Set IP address for peer router 1)
(Set remote AS number)
(Select external peer router 2)
(Enable this peer configuration)
(Set IP address for peer router 2)
(Set remote AS number)
>> BGP Peer 2# addr 20.20.20.2
>> BGP Peer 2# ras 200
4. Configure redistribution for Peer 1.
>> # /cfg/l3/bgp/peer 1/redist
>> BGP Peer 1# default redistribute
>> BGP Peer 1# fixed ena
(Select redistribute)
(Set default to redistribute)
(Enable fixed routes)
5. Configure aggregation policy control.
Configure the routes that you want aggregated.
>> # /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr 1
(Set aggregation number)
>> BGP aggr 1# addr 135.0.0.0
>> BGP Peer 1# mask 255.0.0.0
(Add IP address to aggregate 1)
(Add IP mask to aggregate 1)
186 „ Chapter 11: Border Gateway Protocol
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 12
OSPF
Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. The Alteon OS
implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.
„
„
„
“OSPF Overview” on page 188. This section provides information on OSPF concepts,
such as types of OSPF areas, types of routing devices, neighbors, adjacencies, link state
database, authentication, and internal versus external routing.
“OSPF Implementation in Alteon OS” on page 193. This section describes how OSPF is
implemented in Alteon OS, such as configuration parameters, electing the designated
router, summarizing routes, defining route maps and so forth.
“OSPF Configuration Examples” on page 204. This section provides step-by-step instruc-
tions on configuring different configuration examples:
†
†
†
Creating a simple OSPF domain
Creating virtual links
Summarizing routes
42C4911, January 2007
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
OSPF Overview
OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System
(AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.
All routing devices maintain link information in their own Link State Database (LSDB). The
LSDB for all routing devices within an area is identical but is not exchanged between different
areas. Only routing updates are exchanged between areas, thereby significantly reducing the
overhead for maintaining routing information on a large, dynamic network.
The following sections describe key OSPF concepts.
Types of OSPF Areas
An AS can be broken into logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple areas, one
area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone acts as the central
OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. Areas inject sum-
mary routing information into the backbone, which then distributes it to other areas as needed.
As shown in Figure 12-1, OSPF defines the following types of areas:
„
Stub Area—an area that is connected to only one other area. External route information is
not distributed into stub areas.
„
Not-So-Stubby-Area (NSSA)—similar to a stub area with additional capabilities. Routes
originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone
areas. External routes from outside the AS can be advertised within the NSSA but are not
distributed into other areas.
188 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
„
Transit Area—an area that allows area summary information to be exchanged between
routing devices. The backbone (area 0), any area that contains a virtual link to connect two
areas, and any area that is not a stub area or an NSSA are considered transit areas.
Backbone
Area 0
(Also a Transit Area)
ABR
ABR
ABR
Internal LSA
Routes
Virtual
Link
Transit Area
Stub Area
No External Routes
from Backbone
Not-So-Stubby Area
(NSSA)
ABR
External LSA
Routes
ASBR
Stub Area, NSSA,
ABR = Area Border Router
or Transit Area
ASBR = Autonomous System
Boundary Router
Connected to Backbone
via Virtual Link
Non-OSPF Area
RIP/BGP AS
Figure 12-1 OSPF Area Types
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Types of OSPF Routing Devices
As shown in Figure 12-2, OSPF uses the following types of routing devices:
„
„
„
Internal Router (IR)—a router that has all of its interfaces within the same area. IRs main-
tain LSDBs identical to those of other routing devices within the local area.
Area Border Router (ABR)—a router that has interfaces in multiple areas. ABRs maintain
one LSDB for each connected area and disseminate routing information between areas.
Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR)—a router that acts as a gateway between
the OSPF domain and non-OSPF domains, such as RIP, BGP, and static routes.
OSPF Autonomous System
Backbone
Area 0
BGP
Area 3
Inter-Area Routes
(Summary Routes)
ABR
External
Routes
ASBR
ASBR
RIP
ABR
ABR
Internal
Router
Area 1
Area 2
Figure 12-2 OSPF Domain and an Autonomous System
190 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Neighbors and Adjacencies
In areas with two or more routing devices, neighbors and adjacencies are formed.
Neighbors are routing devices that maintain information about each others’ health. To establish
neighbor relationships, routing devices periodically send hello packets on each of their inter-
faces. All routing devices that share a common network segment, appear in the same area, and
have the same health parameters (helloand deadintervals) and authentication parameters
respond to each other’s hello packets and become neighbors. Neighbors continue to send peri-
odic hello packets to advertise their health to neighbors. In turn, they listen to hello packets to
determine the health of their neighbors and to establish contact with new neighbors.
The hello process is used for electing one of the neighbors as the area’s Designated Router
(DR) and one as the area’s Backup Designated Router (BDR). The DR is adjacent to all other
neighbors and acts as the central contact for database exchanges. Each neighbor sends its data-
base information to the DR, which relays the information to the other neighbors.
The BDR is adjacent to all other neighbors (including the DR). Each neighbor sends its data-
base information to the BDR just as with the DR, but the BDR merely stores this data and does
not distribute it. If the DR fails, the BDR will take over the task of distributing database infor-
mation to the other neighbors.
The Link-State Database
OSPF is a link-state routing protocol. A link represents an interface (or routable path) from the
routing device. By establishing an adjacency with the DR, each routing device in an OSPF area
maintains an identical Link-State Database (LSDB) describing the network topology for its
area.
Each routing device transmits a Link-State Advertisement (LSA) on each of its interfaces.
LSAs are entered into the LSDB of each routing device. OSPF uses flooding to distribute
LSAs between routing devices.
When LSAs result in changes to the routing device’s LSDB, the routing device forwards the
changes to the adjacent neighbors (the DR and BDR) for distribution to the other neighbors.
OSPF routing updates occur only when changes occur, instead of periodically. For each new
route, if an adjacency is interested in that route (for example, if configured to receive static
routes and the new route is indeed static), an update message containing the new route is sent
to the adjacency. For each route removed from the route table, if the route has already been
sent to an adjacency, an update message containing the route to withdraw is sent.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The Shortest Path First Tree
The routing devices use a link-state algorithm (Dijkstra’s algorithm) to calculate the shortest
path to all known destinations, based on the cumulative cost required to reach the destination.
The cost of an individual interface in OSPF is an indication of the overhead required to send
packets across it. The cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. A lower
cost indicates a higher bandwidth.
Internal Versus External Routing
To ensure effective processing of network traffic, every routing device on your network needs
to know how to send a packet (directly or indirectly) to any other location/destination in your
network. This is referred to as internal routing and can be done with static routes or using
active internal routing protocols, such as OSPF, RIP, or RIPv2.
It is also useful to tell routers outside your network (upstream providers or peers) about the
routes you have access to in your network. Sharing of routing information between autono-
mous systems is known as external routing.
Typically, an AS will have one or more border routers (peer routers that exchange routes with
other OSPF networks) as well as an internal routing system enabling every router in that AS to
reach every other router and destination within that AS.
When a routing device advertises routes to boundary routers on other autonomous systems, it
is effectively committing to carry data to the IP space represented in the route being advertised.
For example, if the routing device advertises 192.204.4.0/24, it is declaring that if another
router sends data destined for any address in the 192.204.4.0/24 range, it will carry that data to
its destination.
192 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
OSPF Implementation in Alteon OS
Alteon OS supports a single instance of OSPF and up to 4 K routes on the network. The follow-
ing sections describe OSPF implementation in Alteon OS:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
“Defining Areas” on page 194
“Electing the Designated Router and Backup” on page 196
“Summarizing Routes” on page 196
“Default Routes” on page 197
“Virtual Links” on page 198
“Router ID” on page 199
“Authentication” on page 199
Configurable Parameters
In Alteon OS, OSPF parameters can be configured through the Command Line Interfaces
(CLI/ISCLI), Browser-Based Interface (BBI), or through SNMP. For more information, see
Chapter 1, “Accessing the Switch.”
The CLI supports the following parameters: interface output cost, interface priority, dead and
hello intervals, retransmission interval, and interface transmit delay.
In addition to the above parameters, you can also specify the following:
„
Shortest Path First (SPF) interval—Time interval between successive calculations of the
shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.
„
Stub area metric—A stub area can be configured to send a numeric metric value such that
all routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influence
routing decisions.
„
Default routes—Default routes with weight metrics can be manually injected into transit
areas. This helps establish a preferred route when multiple routing devices exist between
two areas. It also helps route traffic to external networks.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Defining Areas
If you are configuring multiple areas in your OSPF domain, one of the areas must be desig-
nated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone is the central OSPF area and is usually
which, in turn, disseminates the information into other areas.
Since the backbone connects the areas in your network, it must be a contiguous area. If the
backbone is partitioned (possibly as a result of joining separate OSPF networks), parts of the
AS will be unreachable, and you will need to configure virtual links to reconnect the parti-
tioned areas (see “Virtual Links” on page 198).
Up to three OSPF areas can be connected to the GbE Switch Module with Alteon OS software.
To configure an area, the OSPF number must be defined and then attached to a network inter-
face on the switch. The full process is explained in the following sections.
An OSPF area is defined by assigning two pieces of information—an area index and an area
ID. The command to define an OSPF area is as follows:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index>/areaid <n.n.n.n>
NOTE – The aindexoption above is an arbitrary index used only on the switch and does not
represent the actual OSPF area number. The actual OSPF area number is defined in the
areaidportion of the command as explained in the following sections.
Assigning the Area Index
The aindex<area index> option is actually just an arbitrary index (0-2) used only by the
GbE Switch Module. This index does not necessarily represent the OSPF area number, though
for configuration simplicity, it should where possible.
For example, both of the following sets of commands define OSPF area 0 (the backbone) and
area 1 because that information is held in the area ID portion of the command. However, the
first set of commands is easier to maintain because the arbitrary area indexes agree with the
area IDs:
„
Area index and area ID agree
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 0/areaid 0.0.0.0 (Use index 0 to set area 0 in ID octet format)
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 1/areaid 0.0.0.1 (Use index 1 to set area 1 in ID octet format)
„
Area index set to an arbitrary value
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 1/areaid 0.0.0.0 (Use index 1 to set area 0 in ID octet format)
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 2/areaid 0.0.0.1 (Use index 2 to set area 1 in ID octet format)
194 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Using the Area ID to Assign the OSPF Area Number
The OSPF area number is defined in the areaid<IP address> option. The octet format is
used in order to be compatible with two different systems of notation used by other OSPF net-
work vendors. There are two valid ways to designate an area ID:
„
Placing the area number in the last octet (0.0.0.n)
Most common OSPF vendors express the area ID number as a single number. For exam-
ple, the Cisco IOS-based router command “network1.1.1.00.0.0.255area1”
defines the area number simply as “area1.” On the GbE Switch Module, using the last
octet in the area ID, “area1” is equivalent to “areaid0.0.0.1”.
„
Multi-octet (IP address)
Some OSPF vendors express the area ID number in multi-octet format. For example,
“area2.2.2.2” represents OSPF area 2 and can be specified directly on the GbE
Switch Module as “areaid2.2.2.2”.
NOTE – Although both types of area ID formats are supported, be sure that the area IDs are in
the same format throughout an area.
Attaching an Area to a Network
Once an OSPF area has been defined, it must be associated with a network. To attach the area
to a network, you must assign the OSPF area index to an IP interface that participates in the
area. The format for the command is as follows:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/if <interface number>/aindex <area index>
For example, the following commands could be used to configure IP interface 14 for a pres-
ence on the 10.10.10.1/24 network, to define OSPF area 1, and to attach the area to the net-
work:
>> # /cfg/l3/if 14
>> IP Interface 14# addr 10.10.10.1
(Select menu for IP interface 14)
(Define IP address on backbone
network)
>> IP Interface 14# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 14# ena
(Define IP mask on backbone)
(Enable IP interface 14)
>> IP Interface 14# ../ospf/aindex 1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # areaid 0.0.0.1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # ena
(Select menu for area index 1)
(Define area ID as OSPF area 1)
(Enable area index 1)
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # ../if 14
>> OSPF Interface 14# aindex 1
(Select OSPF menu for interface 14)
(Attach area to network on interface
14)
>> OSPF Interface 14# enable
(Enable interface 14 for area index 1)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Interface Cost
The OSPF link-state algorithm (Dijkstra’s algorithm) places each routing device at the root of a
tree and determines the cumulative cost required to reach each destination. Usually, the cost is
inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.
You can manually enter the cost for the output route with the following command:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/if <OSPF interface number>/cost <cost value (1-65535)>
Electing the Designated Router and Backup
In any area with more than two routing devices, a Designated Router (DR) is elected as the
central contact for database exchanges among neighbors, and a Backup Designated Router
(BDR) is elected in case the DR fails.
DR and BDR elections are made through the hello process. The election can be influenced by
assigning a priority value to the OSPF interfaces on the GbE Switch Module. The command is
as follows:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/if <OSPF interface number>/prio <priority value (0-255)>
A priority value of 255 is the highest, and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that
the interface cannot be used as a DR or BDR. In case of a tie, the routing device with the low-
est router ID wins.
Summarizing Routes
Route summarization condenses routing information. Without summarization, each routing
device in an OSPF network would retain a route to every subnet in the network. With summa-
rization, routing devices can reduce some sets of routes to a single advertisement, reducing
both the load on the routing device and the perceived complexity of the network. The impor-
tance of route summarization increases with network size.
Summary routes can be defined for up to 16 IP address ranges using the following command:
<mask>
where <range number> is a number 1 to 16, <IP address> is the base IP address for the range,
and <mask> is the IP address mask for the range. For a detailed configuration example, see
“Example 3: Summarizing Routes” on page 211.
196 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Default Routes
nize, it forwards that traffic along the default route. Typically, the default route leads upstream
toward the backbone until it reaches the intended area or an external router.
Each GbE Switch Module acting as an ABR automatically inserts a default route into each
attached area. In simple OSPF stub areas or NSSAs with only one ABR leading upstream (see
Area 1 in Figure 12-3), any traffic for IP address destinations outside the area is forwarded to
the switch’s IP interface, and then into the connected transit area (usually the backbone). Since
this is automatic, no further configuration is required for such areas.
BladeCenter
BladeCenter
Figure 12-3 Injecting Default Routes
If the switch is in a transit area and has a configured default gateway, it can inject a default
route into rest of the OSPF domain. Use the following command to configure the switch to
inject OSPF default routes:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/default <metric value> <metric type (1 or 2)>
In the command above, <metric value> sets the priority for choosing this switch for default
route. The value nonesets no default and 1 sets the highest priority for default route. Metric
type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.
When the switch is configured to inject a default route, an AS-external LSA with link state
ID 0.0.0.0 is propagated throughout the OSPF routing domain. This LSA is sent with the con-
figured metric value and metric type.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The OSPF default route configuration can be removed with the command:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/default none
Virtual Links
Usually, all areas in an OSPF AS are physically connected to the backbone. In some cases
where this is not possible, you can use a virtual link. Virtual links are created to connect one
area to the backbone through another non-backbone area (see Figure 12-1 on page 189).
The area which contains a virtual link must be a transit area and have full routing information.
Virtual links cannot be configured inside a stub area or NSSA. The area type must be defined
as transitusing the following command:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index>/type transit
The virtual link must be configured on the routing devices at each endpoint of the virtual link,
though they may traverse multiple routing devices. To configure a GbE Switch Module as one
endpoint of a virtual link, use the following command:
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/virt <link number>/aindex <area index>/nbr <router
ID>
at the target endpoint. Another router ID is needed when configuring a virtual link in the other
direction. To provide the GbE Switch Module with a router ID, see the following section
Router ID.
For a detailed configuration example on Virtual Links, see “Example 2: Virtual Links” on page
207.
198 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Router ID
Routing devices in OSPF areas are identified by a router ID. The router ID is expressed in IP
address format. The IP address of the router ID is not required to be included in any IP inter-
face range or in any OSPF area.
The router ID can be configured in one of the following two ways:
„
Dynamically—OSPF protocol configures the lowest IP interface IP address as the router
ID. This is the default.
„
Statically—Use the following command to manually configure the router ID:
>> # /cfg/l3/rtrid <IP address>
„
To modify the router ID from static to dynamic, set the router ID to 0.0.0.0, save the con-
figuration, and reboot the GbE Switch Module. To view the router ID, enter:
>> # /info/l3/ospf/gen
Authentication
OSPF protocol exchanges can be authenticated so that only trusted routing devices can partici-
pate. This ensures less processing on routing devices that are not listening to OSPF packets.
OSPF allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending and receiving packets.
Routers participate in routing domains based on predefined passwords. Alteon OS supports
simple password (type 1 plain text passwords) and MD5 cryptographic authentication. This
type of authentication allows a password to be configured per area.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 12-4 shows authentication configured for area 0 with the password test. Simple authen-
tication is also configured for the virtual link between area 2 and area 0. Area 1 is not config-
ured for OSPF authentication.
Application
Switch 3
Application
Application
switch 5
BladeCenter
Switch 4
BladeCenter
Figure 12-4 OSPF Authentication
To configure simple plain text OSPF passwords on the switches shown in Figure 12-4 use the
following commands:
1. Enable OSPF authentication for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 0/auth password
(Turn on OSPF password authenti-
cation)
2. Configure a simple text password up to eight characters for each OSPF IP interface in
Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # key test
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # key test
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 3
>> OSPF Interface 3 # key test
200 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Enable OSPF authentication for Area 2 on switch 4.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 2/auth password
(Turn on OSPF password authenti-
cation)
4. Configure a simple text password up to eight characters for the virtual link between Area
2 and Area 0 on switches 2 and 4.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/virt 1/key alteon
Use the following commands to configure MD5 authentication on the switches shown in Fig-
ure 12-4:
1. Enable OSPF MD5 authentication for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 0/auth md5
(Turn on MD5 authentication)
2. Configure MD5 key ID for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key 1/key test
3. Assign MD5 key ID to OSPF interfaces on switches 1, 2, and 3.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # mdkey 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # mdkey 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 3
>> OSPF Interface 3 # mdkey 1
4. Enable OSPF MD5 authentication for Area 2 on switch 4.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex 2/auth md5
5. Configure MD5 key for the virtual link between Area 2 and Area 0 on switches 2 and 4.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key 2/key alteon
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
6. Assign MD5 key ID to OSPF virtual link on switches 2 and 4.
>> # /cfg/l3/ospf/virt 1/mdkey 2
Host Routes for Load Balancing
Alteon OS implementation of OSPF includes host routes. Host routes are used for advertising
network device IP addresses to external networks, accomplishing the following goals:
„
ABR Load Sharing
As a form of load balancing, host routes can be used for dividing OSPF traffic among mul-
tiple ABRs. To accomplish this, each switch provides identical services but advertises a
host route for a different IP address to the external network. If each IP address serves a dif-
ferent and equal portion of the external world, incoming traffic from the upstream router
should be split evenly among ABRs.
„
„
ABR Failover
Complementing ABR load sharing, identical host routes can be configured on each ABR.
These host routes can be given different costs so that a different ABR is selected as the
preferred route for each server and the others are available as backups for failover pur-
poses.
Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP)
With equal cost multipath, a router potentially has several available next hops towards any
given destination. ECMP allows separate routes to be calculated for each IP Type of Ser-
vice. All paths of equal cost to a given destination are calculated, and the next hops for all
equal-cost paths are inserted into the routing table.
If redundant routes via multiple routing processes (such as OSPF, RIP, BGP, or static routes)
exist on your network, the switch defaults to the OSPF-derived route.
202 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
OSPF Features Not Supported in This Release
The following OSPF features are not supported in this release:
„
„
„
„
Summarizing external routes
Filtering OSPF routes
Using OSPF to forward multicast routes
Configuring OSPF on non-broadcast multi-access networks (such as frame relay, X.25,
and ATM)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
OSPF Configuration Examples
A summary of the basic steps for configuring OSPF on the GbE Switch Module is listed here.
Detailed instructions for each of the steps is covered in the following sections:
1. Configure IP interfaces.
One IP interface is required for each desired network (range of IP addresses) being assigned to
an OSPF area on the switch.
2. (Optional) Configure the router ID.
The router ID is required only when configuring virtual links on the switch.
3. Enable OSPF on the switch.
4. Define the OSPF areas.
5. Configure OSPF interface parameters.
IP interfaces are used for attaching networks to the various areas.
6. (Optional) Configure route summarization between OSPF areas.
7. (Optional) Configure virtual links.
8. (Optional) Configure host routes.
204 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Example 1: Simple OSPF Domain
In this example, two OSPF areas are defined—one area is the backbone and the other is a stub
area. A stub area does not allow advertisements of external routes, thus reducing the size of the
database. Instead, a default summary route of IP address 0.0.0.0 is automatically inserted into
the stub area. Any traffic for IP address destinations outside the stub area will be forwarded to
the stub area’s IP interface, and then into the backbone.
BladeCenter
BladeCenter
nter
Network
10.10.12.0/24
Network
10.10.7.0/24
Figure 12-5 A Simple OSPF Domain
Follow this procedure to configure OSPF support as shown in Figure 12-5:
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to OSPF areas.
In this example, two IP interfaces are needed: one for the backbone network on 10.10.7.0/24
and one for the stub area network on 10.10.12.0/24.
>> # /cfg/l3/if 1
(Select menu for IP interface 1)
(Set IP address on backbone network)
(Set IP mask on backbone network)
(Enable IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1 # addr 10.10.7.1
>> IP Interface 1 # mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 1 # enable
>> IP Interface 1 # ../if 2
(Select menu for IP interface 2)
(Set IP address on stub area network)
(Set IP mask on stub area network)
(Enable IP interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2 # addr 10.10.12.1
>> IP Interface 2 # mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 2 # enable
2. Enable OSPF.
>> IP Interface 2 # /cfg/l3/ospf/on
(Enable OSPF on the switch)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Define the backbone.
The backbone is always configured as a transit area using areaid0.0.0.0.
>> Open Shortest Path First # aindex 0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # areaid 0.0.0.0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # type transit
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # enable
(Select menu for area index 0)
(Set the ID for backbone area 0)
(Define backbone as transit type)
(Enable the area)
4. Define the stub area.
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # ../aindex 1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # areaid 0.0.0.1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # type stub
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # enable
(Select menu for area index 1)
(Set the area ID for OSPF area 1)
(Define area as stub type)
(Enable the area)
5. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
>> OSPF Area 1 # ../if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # aindex 0
>> OSPF Interface 1 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 1)
(Attach network to backbone index)
(Enable the backbone interface)
6. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # aindex 1
>> OSPF Interface 2 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 2)
(Attach network to stub area index)
(Enable the stub area interface)
7. Apply and save the configuration changes.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # apply
>> OSPF Interface 2 # save
(Global command to apply all changes)
(Global command to save all changes)
206 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Example 2: Virtual Links
In the example shown in Figure 12-6, area 2 is not physically connected to the backbone as is
usually required. Instead, area 2 will be connected to the backbone via a virtual link through
area 1. The virtual link must be configured at each endpoint.
Switch 2
Application
Switch 1
BladeCenter
BladeCenter
Figure 12-6 Configuring a Virtual Link
Configuring OSPF for a Virtual Link on Switch #1
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to the switch.
In this example, two IP interfaces are needed on Switch #1: one for the backbone network on
10.10.7.0/24 and one for the transit area network on 10.10.12.0/24.
>> # /cfg/l3/if 1
(Select menu for IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1 # addr 10.10.7.1
(Set IP address on backbone network)
>> IP Interface 1 # mask 255.255.255.0 (Set IP mask on backbone network)
>> IP Interface 1 # enable
(Enable IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> IP Interface 2 # addr 10.10.12.1
(Select menu for IP interface 2)
(Set IP address on transit area network)
>> IP Interface 2 # mask 255.255.255.0 (Set IP mask on transit area network)
>> IP Interface 2 # enable
(Enable interface 2)
2. Configure the router ID.
A router ID is required when configuring virtual links. Later, when configuring the other end
of the virtual link on Switch 2, the router ID specified here will be used as the target virtual
neighbor (nbr) address.
>> IP Interface 2 # /cfg/l3/rtrid 10.10.10.1 (Set static router ID on switch 1)
3. Enable OSPF.
>> IP # /cfg/l3/ospf/on
(Enable OSPF on switch 1)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
4. Define the backbone.
>> Open Shortest Path First # aindex 0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # areaid 0.0.0.0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # type transit
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # enable
(Select menu for area index 0)
(Set the area ID for backbone area 0)
(Define backbone as transit type)
(Enable the area)
5. Define the transit area.
The area that contains the virtual link must be configured as a transit area.
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # ../aindex 1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # areaid 0.0.0.1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # type transit
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # enable
(Select menu for area index 1)
(Set the area ID for OSPF area 1)
(Define area as transit type)
(Enable the area)
6. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # ../if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # aindex 0
>> OSPF Interface 1 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 1)
(Attach network to backbone index)
(Enable the backbone interface)
7. Attach the network interface to the transit area.
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 2)
(Attach network to transit area index)
(Enable the transit area interface)
8. Configure the virtual link.
The nbrrouter ID configured in this step must be the same as the router ID that will be config-
ured for Switch #2 in Step 2 on page 209.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # ../virt 1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # aindex 1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # nbr 10.10.14.1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # enable
(Specify a virtual link number)
(Specify the transit area for the virtual link)
(Specify the router ID of the recipient)
(Enable the virtual link)
9. Apply and save the configuration changes.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # apply
>> OSPF Interface 2 # save
(Global command to apply all changes)
(Global command to save all changes)
208 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring OSPF for a Virtual Link on Switch #2
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to OSPF areas.
Two IP interfaces are needed on Switch #2: one for the transit area network on 10.10.12.0/24
and one for the stub area network on 10.10.24.0/24.
>> # /cfg/l3/if 1
>> IP Interface 1 # addr 10.10.12.2
(Select menu for IP interface 1)
(Set IP address on transit area net-
work)
>
> IP Interface 1 # mask 255.255.255.0
(Set IP mask on transit area network)
(Enable IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1 # enable
>> IP Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> IP Interface 2 # addr 10.10.24.1
(Select menu for IP interface 2)
(Set IP address on stub area network)
(Enable IP interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2 # mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 2 # enable
2. Configure the router ID.
A router ID is required when configuring virtual links. This router ID should be the same one
specified as the target virtual neighbor (nbr) on switch 1 in Step 8 on page 208.
>> IP Interface 2 # /cfg/l3/rtrid 10.10.14.1 (Set static router ID on switch 2)
3. Enable OSPF.
>> IP# /cfg/l3/ospf/on
(Enable OSPF on switch 2)
4. Define the backbone.
This version of Alteon OS requires that a backbone index be configured on the non-backbone
end of the virtual link as follows:
>> Open Shortest Path First # aindex 0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # areaid 0.0.0.0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # enable
(Select the menu for area index 0)
(Set the area ID for OSPF area 0)
(Enable the area)
5. Define the transit area.
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # ../aindex 1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # areaid 0.0.0.1
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # type transit
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # enable
(Select menu for area index 1)
(Set the area ID for OSPF area 1)
(Define area as transit type)
(Enable the area)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
6. Define the stub area.
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # ../aindex 2
>> OSPF Area (index) 2 # areaid 0.0.0.2
>> OSPF Area (index) 2 # type stub
>> OSPF Area (index) 2 # enable
(Select the menu for area index 2)
(Set the area ID for OSPF area 2)
(Define area as stub type)
(Enable the area)
7. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
>> OSPF Area (index) 2 # ../if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # aindex 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 1)
(Attach network to transit area index)
(Enable the transit area interface)
8. Attach the network interface to the transit area.
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 2)
(Attach network to stub area index)
(Enable the stub area interface)
9. Configure the virtual link.
The nbrrouter ID configured in this step must be the same as the router ID that was config-
ured for switch #1 in Step 2 on page 207.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # ../virt 1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # aindex 1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # nbr 10.10.10.1
>> OSPF Virtual Link 1 # enable
(Specify a virtual link number)
(Specify the transit area for the virtual link)
(Specify the router ID of the recipient)
(Enable the virtual link)
10. Apply and save the configuration changes.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # apply
>> OSPF Interface 2 # save
(Global command to apply all changes)
(Global command to save all changes)
Other Virtual Link Options
„
You can use redundant paths by configuring multiple virtual links.
„
Only the endpoints of the virtual link are configured. The virtual link path may traverse
multiple routers in an area as long as there is a routable path between the endpoints.
210 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Example 3: Summarizing Routes
By default, ABRs advertise all the network addresses from one area into another area. Route
summarization can be used for consolidating advertised addresses and reducing the perceived
complexity of the network.
If the network IP addresses in an area are assigned to a contiguous subnet range, you can con-
figure the ABR to advertise a single summary route that includes all the individual IP
addresses within the area.
The following example shows one summary route from area 1 (stub area) injected into area 0
(the backbone). The summary route consists of all IP addresses from 36.128.192.0 through
36.128.254.255 except for the routes in the range 36.128.200.0 through 36.128.200.255.
BladeCenter
BladeCenter
Figure 12-7 Summarizing Routes
NOTE – You can specify a range of addresses to prevent advertising by using the hide option. In
this example, routes in the range 36.128.200.0 through 36.128.200.255 are kept private.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Follow this procedure to configure OSPF support as shown in Figure 12-7:
1. Configure IP interfaces for each network which will be attached to OSPF areas.
>> # /cfg/l3/if 1
>> IP Interface 1 # addr 10.10.7.1
(Select menu for IP interface 1)
(Set IP address on backbone network)
(Set IP mask on backbone network)
(Enable IP interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1 # mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 1 # ena
>> IP Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> IP Interface 2 # addr 36.128.192.1
(Select menu for IP interface 2)
(Set IP address on stub area network)
(Set IP mask on stub area network)
(Enable IP interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2 # mask 255.255.192.0
>> IP Interface 2 # ena
2. Enable OSPF.
>> IP Interface 2 # /cfg/l3/ospf/on
(Enable OSPF on the switch)
(Select menu for area index 0)
3. Define the backbone.
>> Open Shortest Path First # aindex 0
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # areaid 0.0.0.0 (Set the ID for backbone area 0)
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # type transit
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # enable
(Define backbone as transit type)
(Enable the area)
4. Define the stub area.
>> OSPF Area (index) 0 # ../aindex 1
(Select menu for area index 1)
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # areaid 0.0.0.1 (Set the area ID for OSPF area 1)
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # type stub
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # enable
(Define area as stub type)
(Enable the area)
5. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
>> OSPF Area (index) 1 # ../if 1
>> OSPF Interface 1 # aindex 0
>> OSPF Interface 1 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 1)
(Attach network to backbone index)
(Enable the backbone interface)
6. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
>> OSPF Interface 1 # ../if 2
>> OSPF Interface 2 # aindex 1
>> OSPF Interface 2 # enable
(Select OSPF menu for IP interface 2)
(Attach network to stub area index)
(Enable the stub area interface)
212 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
7. Configure route summarization by specifying the starting address and mask of the range
of addresses to be summarized.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # ../range 1
(Select menu for summary range)
(Set base IP address of summary range)
(Set mask address for summary range)
(Inject summary route into backbone)
(Enable summary range)
>> OSPF Summary Range 1 # addr 36.128.192.0
>> OSPF Summary Range 1 # mask 255.255.192.0
>> OSPF Summary Range 1 # aindex 0
>> OSPF Summary Range 1 # enable
8. Use the hide command to prevent a range of addresses from advertising to the backbone.
>> OSPF Interface 2 # ../range 2
(Select menu for summary range)
(Set base IP address)
(Set mask address)
>> OSPF Summary Range 2 # addr 36.128.200.0
>> OSPF Summary Range 2 # mask 255.255.255.0
>> OSPF Summary Range 2 # hide enable
(Hide the range of addresses)
9. Apply and save the configuration changes.
>> OSPF Summary Range 2 # apply
>> OSPF Summary Range 2 # save
(Global command to apply all changes)
(Global command to save all changes)
Verifying OSPF Configuration
Use the following commands to verify the OSPF configuration on your switch:
„ /info/l3/ospf/general
„ /info/l3/ospf/nbr
„ /info/l3/ospf/dbase/dbsum
„ /info/l3/ospf/route
„ /stats/l3/route
Refer to the Alteon OS Command Reference for information on the above commands.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 12: OSPF „ 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
214 „ Chapter 12: OSPF
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part 3: High Availability
Fundamentals
Internet traffic consists of myriad services and applications which use the Internet Protocol
(IP) for data delivery. However, IP is not optimized for all the various applications. High
Availability goes beyond IP and makes intelligent switching decisions to provide redundant
network configurations.
„
High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
216
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 13
High Availability
GbE Switch Modules support high-availability network topologies through an enhanced
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
„
„
„
„
„
„
“Layer 2 Failover” on page 218. This section discusses trunk failover without using
VRRP.
“VRRP Overview” on page 224. This section discusses VRRP operation and Alteon OS
redundancy configurations.
“Failover Methods” on page 227. This section describes the three modes of high availabil-
ity.
“Alteon OS extensions to VRRP” on page 230. This section describes VRRP enhance-
ments implemented in Alteon OS.
“Virtual Router Deployment Considerations” on page 231. This section describes issues to
consider when deploying virtual routers.
“High Availability Configurations” on page 233. This section discusses the more useful
and easily deployed redundant configurations.
†
†
“Active-Active Configuration” on page 233
“Hot-Standby Configuration” on page 238
42C4911, January 2007
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Layer 2 Failover
The primary application for Layer 2 Failover is to support Network Adapter Teaming.
With Network Adapter Teaming, the NICs on each server all share the same IP address,
and are configured into a team. One NIC is the primary link, and the other is a standby link.
For more details, refer to the NetXen 10 Gb Ethernet Adapter documentation.
NOTE – Only two links per server blade can be used for Layer 2 Trunk Failover
(one primary and one backup). Network Adapter Teaming allows only one backup NIC for
each server blade.
Layer 2 Failover can be enabled on any trunk group in the GbE Switch Module, including
LACP trunks. Trunks can be added to failover trigger groups such that if some (or all) of the
links fail in a trigger, the switch disables all internal ports in the switch (unless VLAN Monitor
is turned on). When the internal ports are disabled, it causes the NIC team on the affected
server blades to failover from the primary to the backup NIC. This process is called a failover
event.
When the appropriate number of links in a trigger group return to service, the switch enables
the internal ports. This causes the NIC team on the affected server blades to fail back to the pri-
mary switch (unless Auto-Fallback is disabled on the NIC team). The backup switch processes
traffic until the primary switch’s internal links come up, which takes up to five seconds.
VLAN Monitor
The VLAN Monitor allows L2 Failover to discern different VLANs. With VLAN Monitor
turned on:
„
„
If enough links in a trigger go down (see “Setting the Failover Limit” on page 219), the
switch disables all internal ports that reside in the same VLAN membership as the trunk(s)
in the trigger.
When enough links in the trigger return to service, the switch enables the internal ports
that reside in the same VLAN membership as the trunk(s) in the trigger.
If you turn off the VLAN Monitor (/cfg/failovr/vlan/off), only one failover trigger
is allowed. When a link failure occurs on the trigger, the switch disables all internal server-
blade ports.
218 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Setting the Failover Limit
The failover limit lets you specify the minimum number of operational links required
within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event. For example, if the limit is two
(/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger x/limit 2), a failover event occurs when the number
of operational links in the trigger is two or fewer. When you set the limit to zero, the switch
triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational.
L2 Failover with Other Features
L2 Failover works together with Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) and with
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), as described below.
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows the switch to form dynamic trunks.
You can use the admin key to add LACP trunks to a failover trigger. When you add an admin
key to a trigger (/cfg/failovr/trigger x/amon/addkey), any LACP trunk with
that admin key becomes a member of the trigger.
Spanning Tree Protocol
If Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled on the ports in a failover trigger, the switch moni-
tors the port STP state rather than the link state. A port failure results when STP is not in a For-
warding state (that is, Listening, Learning, Blocking, or No Link). The switch automatically
disables the appropriate internal ports, based on the VLAN monitor.
When the switch determines that ports in the trigger are in STP Forwarding state, then it auto-
matically enables the appropriate internal ports, based on the VLAN monitor. The switch fails
back to normal operation.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring L2 Failover:
„
„
A failover trigger can monitor multiple static trunks or a single LACP key, but not both.
With VLAN Monitor on, the following additional guidelines apply:
†
All external ports in all trunks that are added to a single failover trigger must have the
same VLAN membership and have the same PVID.
†
†
†
Each failover trigger must operate on a different VLAN membership.
Multiple failover triggers cannot operate on the same internal port.
For each port in each trunk in a failover trigger, the trigger monitors the STP state
only on the default PVID.
L2 Failover Configurations
Figure 13-1 is a simple example of Layer 2 Failover. One GbE Switch Module is the primary,
and the other is used as a backup. In this example, all external ports on the primary switch
belong to a single trunk group, with Layer 2 Failover enabled, and Failover Limit set to 2. If
two or fewer links in trigger 1 remain active, the switch temporarily disables all internal server-
blade ports that reside in VLAN 1. This action causes a failover event on Server 1 and Server
2.
Trigger 1
Primary
GbESM
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Internet
Trigger 1
Backup
GbESM
Server 4
Enterprise
Routing Switch
BladeCenter
VLAN 1:
VLAN 2:
VLAN Monitor = On
Figure 13-1 Basic Layer 2 Failover
220 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 13-2 shows a configuration with two trunks, each in a different Failover Trigger.
GbESM 1 is the primary switch for Server 1 and Server 2. GbESM 2 is the primary switch for
Server 3 and Server 4. VLAN Monitor is turned on. STP is turned off.
If all links go down in trigger 1, GbESM 1 disables all internal ports that reside in VLAN 1. If
all links in trigger 2 go down, GbESM 1 disables all internal ports that reside in VLAN 2.
Trigger 1
GbESM 1
Server 1
Trigger 2
Server 2
Internet
Server 3
Trigger 1
GbESM 2
Server 4
Trigger 2
Enterprise
Routing Switch
BladeCenter
VLAN 1:
VLAN 2:
VLAN Monitor = On
Figure 13-2 Two trunks, each in a different Failover Trigger
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 13-3 shows a configuration with two trunks. VLAN Monitor is turned off, so only one
Failover Trigger is configured on each switch. GbESM 1 is the primary switch for Server 1 and
Server 2. GbESM 2 is the primary switch for Server 3 and Server 4. STP is turned off.
If all links in trigger 1 go down, GbESM 1 disables all internal links to server blades.
Trigger 1
GbESM 1
Server 1
Server 2
Internet
Server 3
Trigger 1
GbESM 2
Server 4
Enterprise
BladeCenter
Routing Switch
VLAN 1:
VLAN 2:
VLAN Monitor = Off
Figure 13-3 Two trunks, one Failover Trigger
222 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring Trunk Failover
The following procedure pertains to example 1, as shown in Figure 13-1.
1. Configure Network Adapter Teaming on the servers.
2. Define a trunk group on the GbESM.
>> # /cfg/l2/trunk 1
(Select trunk group 1)
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT1
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT2
>> Trunk group 1# add EXT3
>> Trunk group 1# ena
(Add port EXT1 to trunk group 1)
(Add port EXT2 to trunk group 1)
(Add port EXT3 to trunk group 1)
(Enable trunk group 1)
3. Configure Failover parameters.
>> # /cfg/failovr/on
>> Failover# trigger 1
>> Trigger 1# ena
>> Trigger 1# limit 2
>> Trigger 1# amon
(Turn Failover on)
(Select trigger group 1)
(Enable trigger group 1)
(Set Failover limit to 2 links)
(Select Auto Monitor menu)
(Add trunk group 1)
>> Auto Monitor# addtrnk 1
4. Apply and verify the configuration.
>> Auto Monitor# apply
(Make your changes active)
>> Auto Monitor# cur
(View current trunking configuration)
5. Save your new configuration changes.
>> Auto Monitor# save
(Save for restore after reboot)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
VRRP Overview
In a high-availability network topology, no device can create a single point-of-failure for the
network or force a single point-of-failure to any other part of the network. This means that
your network will remain in service despite the failure of any single device. To achieve this
usually requires redundancy for all vital network components.
VRRP enables redundant router configurations within a LAN, providing alternate router paths
for a host to eliminate single points-of-failure within a network. Each participating VRRP-
capable routing device is configured with the same virtual router IP address and ID number.
One of the virtual routers is elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and
assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup
virtual routers will take control of the virtual router IP address and actively process traffic
addressed to it.
With VRRP, Virtual Interface Routers (VIR) allow two VRRP routers to share an IP interface
across the routers. VIRs provide a single Destination IP (DIP) for upstream routers to reach
various servers, and provide a virtual default Gateway for the server blades.
VRRP Components
Each physical router running VRRP is known as a VRRP router.
Virtual Router
Two or more VRRP routers can be configured to form a virtual router (RFC 2338). Each
VRRP router may participate in one or more virtual routers. Each virtual router consists of a
user-configured virtual router identifier (VRID) and an IP address.
Virtual Router MAC Address
The VRID is used to build the virtual router MAC Address. The five highest-order octets of the
virtual router MAC Address are the standard MAC prefix (00-00-5E-00-01) defined in RFC
2338. The VRID is used to form the lowest-order octet.
Owners and Renters
Only one of the VRRP routers in a virtual router may be configured as the IP address owner.
This router has the virtual router’s IP address as its real interface address. This router responds
to packets addressed to the virtual router’s IP address for ICMP pings, TCP connections, and
so on.
224 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
There is no requirement for any VRRP router to be the IP address owner. Most VRRP installa-
tions choose not to implement an IP address owner. For the purposes of this chapter, VRRP
routers that are not the IP address owner are called renters.
Master and Backup Virtual Router
Within each virtual router, one VRRP router is selected to be the virtual router master. See
“Selecting the Master VRRP Router” on page 226 for an explanation of the selection process.
NOTE – If the IP address owner is available, it will always become the virtual router master.
The virtual router master forwards packets sent to the virtual router. It also responds to Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests sent to the virtual router's IP address. Finally, the virtual
router master sends out periodic advertisements to let other VRRP routers know it is alive and
its priority.
Within a virtual router, the VRRP routers not selected to be the master are known as virtual
router backups. Should the virtual router master fail, one of the virtual router backups becomes
the master and assumes its responsibilities.
Virtual Interface Router
At Layer 3, a Virtual Interface Router (VIR) allows two VRRP routers to share an IP interface
across the routers. VIRs provide a single Destination IP (DIP) for upstream routers to reach
various destination networks, and provide a virtual default Gateway.
NOTE – Every VIR must be assigned to an IP interface, and every IP interface must be assigned
to a VLAN. If no port in a VLAN has link up, the IP interface of that VLAN is down, and if the
IP interface of a VIR is down, that VIR goes into INIT state.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
VRRP Operation
Only the virtual router master responds to ARP requests. Therefore, the upstream routers only
forward packets destined to the master. The master also responds to ICMP ping requests. The
backup does not forward any traffic, nor does it respond to ARP requests.
If the master is not available, the backup becomes the master and takes over responsibility for
packet forwarding and responding to ARP requests.
Selecting the Master VRRP Router
Each VRRP router is configured with a priority between 1–254. A bidding process determines
which VRRP router is or becomes the master—the VRRP router with the highest priority.
The master periodically sends advertisements to an IP multicast address. As long as the back-
ups receive these advertisements, they remain in the backup state. If a backup does not receive
an advertisement for three advertisement intervals, it initiates a bidding process to determine
which VRRP router has the highest priority and takes over as master.
If, at any time, a backup determines that it has higher priority than the current master does, it
can preempt the master and become the master itself, unless configured not to do so. In pre-
emption, the backup assumes the role of master and begins to send its own advertisements. The
current master sees that the backup has higher priority and will stop functioning as the master.
A backup router can stop receiving advertisements for one of two reasons—the master can be
down, or all communications links between the master and the backup can be down. If the
master has failed, it is clearly desirable for the backup (or one of the backups, if there is more
than one) to become the master.
NOTE – If the master is healthy but communication between the master and the backup has failed,
there will then be two masters within the virtual router. To prevent this from happening, config-
ure redundant links to be used between the switches that form a virtual router.
226 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Failover Methods
With service availability becoming a major concern on the Internet, service providers are
increasingly deploying Internet traffic control devices, such as application switches, in redun-
dant configurations. Traditionally, these configurations have been hot-standby configurations,
where one switch is active and the other is in a standby mode. A non-VRRP hot-standby con-
figuration is shown in the figure below:
Primary Switch
IP: 200.200.200.100
Internet
Servers
Secondary Switch
IP: 200.200.200.101
Figure 13-4 A Non-VRRP, Hot-Standby Configuration
While hot-standby configurations increase site availability by removing single points-of-fail-
ure, service providers increasingly view them as an inefficient use of network resources
because one functional application switch sits by idly until a failure calls it into action. Service
providers now demand that vendors' equipment support redundant configurations where all
devices can process traffic when they are healthy, increasing site throughput and decreasing
user response times when no device has failed.
Alteon OS high availability configurations are based on VRRP. The Alteon OS implementa-
tion of VRRP includes proprietary extensions.
The Alteon OS implementation of VRRP supports the following modes of high availability:
„
„
Active-Active—based on proprietary Alteon OS extensions to VRRP
Hot-Standby—supports Network Adapter Teaming on your server blades
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Active-Active Redundancy
In an active-active configuration, shown in Figure 13-5, two switches provide redundancy for
each other, with both active at the same time. Each switch processes traffic on a different sub-
net. When a failure occurs, the remaining switch can process traffic on all subnets.
For a configuration example, see “Active-Active Configuration” on page 233.
Active (subnet A and C)
GbESM 1
Servers
Internet
GbESM 2
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Active (subnet B and D)
Figure 13-5 Active-Active Redundancy
228 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Hot-Standby Redundancy
when you have configured Network Adapter Teaming on your server blades. With Network
Adapter Teaming, the NICs on each server share the same IP address, and are configured into a
team. One NIC is the primary link, and the others are backup links. For more details, refer to
the NetXen 10 Gb Ethernet Adapter documentation.
The hot-standby model is shown in Figure 13-6.
Active
GbESM 1
10.10.10.1
10.10.10.2
Interswitch
Link
Enterprise
Routing Switch
GbESM 2
Standby
Figure 13-6 Hot-Standby Redundancy
Virtual Router Group
The virtual router group ties all virtual routers on the switch together as a single entity. By def-
inition, hot-standby requires that all virtual routers failover as a group, and not individually. As
members of a group, all virtual routers on the switch (and therefore the switch itself), are in
either a master or standby state.
The virtual router group cannot be used for active-active configurations or any other configura-
tion that require shared interfaces.
A VRRP group has the following characteristics:
„
„
„
When enabled, all virtual routers behave as one entity, and all group settings override any
individual virtual router settings.
All individual virtual routers, once the VRRP group is enabled, assume the group’s track-
ing and priority.
When one member of a VRRP group fails, the priority of the group decreases, and the
state of the entire switch changes from Master to Standby.
Each VRRP advertisement can include up to 128 addresses. All virtual routers are advertised
within the same packet, conserving processing and buffering resources.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Alteon OS extensions to VRRP
This section describes the following VRRP enhancements that are implemented in Alteon OS:
Tracking VRRP Router Priority
„
Tracking VRRP Router Priority
router, based on its current state. The objective of tracking is to have, whenever possible, the
master bidding processes for various virtual routers in a LAN converge on the same switch.
Tracking ensures that the selected switch is the one that offers optimal network performance.
For tracking to have any effect on virtual router operation, pre-emption must be enabled.
Alteon OS can track the attributes listed in Table 13-1:
Table 13-1 VRRP Tracking Parameters
Parameter
Description
Number of IP interfaces on the switch that Helps elect the virtual routers with the most available
are active (“up”)
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track/ifs
routes as the master. (An IP interface is considered active
when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.)
This parameter influences the VRRP router's priority in
virtual interface routers.
Number of active ports on the same VLAN Helps elect the virtual routers with the most available
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track/ports
ports as the master. This parameter influences the VRRP
router's priority in virtual interface routers.
Note: In a hot-standby configuration, only external ports
are tracked.
Number of virtual routers in master mode Useful for ensuring that traffic for any particular client/
on the switch
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track/vr
server pair is handled by the same switch, increasing rout-
ing efficiency. This parameter influences the VRRP
router's priority in virtual interface routers.
Each tracked parameter has a user-configurable weight associated with it. As the count associ-
ated with each tracked item increases (or decreases), so does the VRRP router's priority, sub-
ject to the weighting associated with each tracked item. If the priority level of a standby is
greater than that of the current master, then the standby can assume the role of the master.
See “Configuring the Switch for Tracking” on page 231 for an example on how to configure
the switch for tracking VRRP priority.
230 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Review the following issues described in this section to prevent network problems when
deploying virtual routers:
„
„
Assigning VRRP Virtual Router ID
Configuring the Switch for Tracking
Assigning VRRP Virtual Router ID
During the software upgrade process, VRRP virtual router IDs will be automatically assigned
if failover is enabled on the switch. When configuring virtual routers at any point after
upgrade, virtual router ID numbers (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr#/vrid) must be assigned. The
Configuring the Switch for Tracking
Tracking configuration largely depends on user preferences and network environment. Con-
sider the configuration shown in Figure 13-5 on page 228. Assume the following behavior on
the network:
„
„
Switch 1 is the master router upon initialization.
If switch 1 is the master and it has one fewer active servers than switch 2, then switch 1
remains the master.
This behavior is preferred because running one server down is less disruptive than bring-
ing a new master online and severing all active connections in the process.
„
„
„
If switch 1 is the master and it has two or more active servers fewer than switch 2, then
switch 2 becomes the master.
If switch 2 is the master, it remains the master even if servers are restored on switch 1 such
that it has one fewer or an equal number of servers.
If switch 2 is the master and it has one active server fewer than switch 1, then switch 1
becomes the master.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
The user can implement this behavior by configuring the switch for tracking as follows:
1. Set the priority for switch 1 to 101.
2. Leave the priority for switch 2 at the default value of 100.
3. On both switches, enable tracking based on ports (ports), interfaces (ifs), or virtual
routers (vr). You can choose any combination of tracking parameters, based on your net-
work configuration.
NOTE – There is no shortcut to setting tracking parameters. The goals must first be set and the
outcomes of various configurations and scenarios analyzed to find settings that meet the goals.
232 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
GbE Switch Modules offer flexibility in implementing redundant configurations. This section
discusses the more useful and easily deployed configurations:
„
„
“Active-Active Configuration” on page 233
“Hot-Standby Configuration” on page 238
Active-Active Configuration
Figure 13-7 shows an example configuration where two GbE Switch Modules are used as
VRRP routers in an active-active configuration. In this configuration, both switches respond to
packets.
VIR 1: 192.168.1.200 (Master)
L2 Switch
VIR 2: 192.168.2.200 (Backup)
1
2
NIC 1: 10.0.1.1/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.1/24
GbESM 1
Server 1
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
5
NIC 1: 10.0.1.2/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.2/24
Internet
NIC 1: 10.0.1.3/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.3/24
5
Enterprise
Routing Switch
1
2
NIC 1: 10.0.1.4/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.4/24
GbESM 2
VIR 1: 192.168.1.200 (Backup)
VIR 2: 192.168.2.200 (Master)
L2 Switch
Figure 13-7 Active-Active High-Availability Configuration
used in a redundant configuration. It is possible to implement an active-active configuration
across all the VRRP-capable switches in a LAN.
Each VRRP-capable switch in an active-active configuration is autonomous. Switches in a vir-
tual router need not be identically configured.
In the scenario illustrated in Figure 13-7, traffic destined for IP address 10.0.1.1 is forwarded
through the Layer 2 switch at the top of the drawing, and ingresses GbESM 1 on port EXT1.
Return traffic uses default gateway 1 (192.168.1.1). If the link between GbESM 1 and the
Layer 2 switch fails, GbESM 2 becomes the Master because it has a higher priority. Traffic is
forwarded to GbESM 2, which forwards it to GbESM 1 through port EXT5. Return traffic uses
default gateway 2 (192.168.2.1), and is forwarded through the Layer 2 switch at the bottom of
the drawing.
To implement the active-active example, perform the following switch configuration.
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Task 1: Configure GbESM 1
1. Configure client and server interfaces.
/cfg/l3/if 1
(Select interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# addr 192.168.1.100
>> IP Interface 1# vlan 10
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Define IP address for interface 1)
(Assign VLAN 10 to interface 1)
(Enable interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# ..
>> Layer 3# if 2
(Select interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# addr 192.168.2.101
>> IP Interface 2# vlan 20
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Define IP address for interface 2)
(Assign VLAN 20 to interface 2)
(Enable interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# ..
>> Layer 3# if 3
(Select interface 3)
>> IP Interface 3# addr 10.0.1.100
>> IP Interface 3# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 3# ena
(Define IP address for interface 3)
(Define subnet mask for interface 3)
(Enable interface 3)
>> IP Interface 3# ..
>> Layer 3# if 4
(Select interface 4)
>> IP Interface 4# addr 10.0.2.101
>> IP Interface 4# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 4# ena
(Define IP address for interface 4)
(Define subnet mask for interface 4)
(Enable interface 4)
2. Configure the default gateways. Each default gateway points to a Layer 3
router.
/cfg/l3/gw 1
(Select default gateway 1)
>> Default gateway 1# addr 192.168.1.1
>> Default gateway 1# ena
>> Default gateway 1# ..
>> Layer 3# gw 2
(Point gateway to the first L3 router)
(Enable the default gateway)
(Select default gateway 2)
>> Default gateway 2# addr 192.168.2.1
>> Default gateway 2# ena
(Point gateway to the second router)
(Enable the default gateway)
234 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Turn on VRRP and configure two Virtual Interface Routers.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/on
(Turn VRRP on)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 1(Select virtual router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# if 1
(Set VRID to 1)
(Set interface 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# addr 192.168.1.200(Define IP address)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
(Enable virtual router 1)
(Enable virtual router 1)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select virtual router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# vrid 2
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# if 2
(Set VRID to 2)
(Set interface 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# addr 192.168.2.200(Define IP address)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# ena (Enable virtual router 2)
4. Enable tracking on ports. Set the priority of Virtual Router 1 to 101, so that it becomes
the Master.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr 1
(Select VRRP virtual router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# track/ports/ena (Set tracking on ports)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking# ..
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# prio 101
(Set the VRRP priority)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select VRRP virtual router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# track/ports/ena (Set tracking on ports)
5. Configure ports.
/cfg/l2/vlan 10
(Select VLAN 10)
>> VLAN 10# ena
(Enable VLAN 10)
>> VLAN 10# add ext1
>> VLAN 10# ..
(Add port EXT 1 to VLAN 10)
>> Layer 2# vlan 20
>> VLAN 20# ena
(Select VLAN 20)
(Enable VLAN 20)
>> VLAN 20# add ext2
(Add port EXT 2 to VLAN 20)
6. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally.
/cfg/l2/stg 1/off
(Turn off STG)
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# apply
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# save
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Task 2: Configure GbESM 2
1. Configure client and server interfaces.
/cfg/l3/if 1
(Select interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# addr 192.168.1.101
>> IP Interface 1# vlan 10
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Define IP address for interface 1)
(Assign VLAN 10 to interface 1)
(Enable interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# ..
>> Layer 3# if 2
(Select interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# addr 192.168.2.100
>> IP Interface 2# vlan 20
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Define IP address for interface 2)
(Assign VLAN 20 to interface 2)
(Enable interface 2)
>> IP Interface 2# ..
>> Layer 3# if 3
(Select interface 3)
>> IP Interface 3# addr 10.0.1.101
>> IP Interface 3# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 3# ena
(Define IP address for interface 3)
(Define subnet mask for interface 3)
(Enable interface 3)
>> IP Interface 3# ..
>> Layer 3# if 4
(Select interface 4)
>> IP Interface 4# addr 10.0.2.100
>> IP Interface 4# mask 255.255.255.0
>> IP Interface 4# ena
(Define IP address for interface 4)
(Define subnet mask for interface 4)
(Enable interface 4)
2. Configure the default gateways. Each default gateway points to a Layer 3
router.
/cfg/l3/gw 1
(Select default gateway 1)
>> Default gateway 1# addr 192.168.2.1
>> Default gateway 1# ena
>> Default gateway 1# ..
>> Layer 3# gw 2
(Point gateway to the first L3 router)
(Enable the default gateway)
(Select default gateway 2)
>> Default gateway 2# addr 192.168.1.1
>> Default gateway 2# ena
(Point gateway to the second router)
(Enable the default gateway)
236 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
3. Turn on VRRP and configure two Virtual Interface Routers.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/on
(Turn VRRP on)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 1(Select virtual router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# if 1
(Set VRID to 1)
(Set interface 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# addr 192.168.1.200(Define IP address)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
(Enable virtual router 1)
(Enable virtual router 1)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select virtual router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# vrid 2
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# if 2
(Set VRID to 2)
(Set interface 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# addr 192.168.2.200(Define IP address)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# ena (Enable virtual router 2)
4. Enable tracking on ports. Set the priority of Virtual Router 2 to 101, so that it becomes
the Master.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr 1
(Select VRRP virtual router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# track/ports/ena (Set tracking on ports)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking# ..
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select VRRP virtual router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# track/ports/ena (Set tracking on ports)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2 Priority Tracking# ..
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# prio 101
(Set the VRRP priority)
5. Configure ports.
/cfg/l2/vlan 10
(Select VLAN 10)
>> VLAN 10# ena
(Enable VLAN 10)
>> VLAN 10# add ext1
>> VLAN 10# ..
(Add port EXT 1 to VLAN 10)
>> Layer 2# vlan 20
>> VLAN 20# ena
(Select VLAN 20)
(Enable VLAN 20)
>> VLAN 20# add ext2
(Add port EXT 2 to VLAN 20)
6. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally. Apply and save changes.
/cfg/l2/stg 1/off
(Turn off STG)
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# apply
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# save
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Hot-Standby Configuration
The primary application for VRRP-based hot-standby is to support Network Adapter Teaming
on your server blades. With Network Adapter Teaming, the NICs on each server share the
same IP address, and are configured into a team. One NIC is the primary link, and the others
are backup links. For more details, refer to the NetXen 10 Gb Ethernet Adapter documentation.
A hot-standby configuration allows all processes to failover to a standby switch if any type of
failure should occur. All Virtual Interface Routers (VIRs) are bundled into one Virtual Router
group, and then they failover together. When there is a failure that causes the VRRP Master to
failover to the Standby, then the original primary switch temporarily disables the internal
server links, which, in turn, causes the NIC teams to failover as well.
NOTE – When using hot-standby redundancy, peer switches should have an equal number of
connected ports.
If hot-standby is implemented in a looped environment, the hot-standby feature automatically
disables the hot-standby ports on the VRRP Standby. If the Master switch should failover to
the Standby switch, it would change the hot-standby ports from disabled to forwarding, with-
out relying on Spanning Tree or manual intervention. Therefore, Spanning Tree must be dis-
abled.
238 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Figure 13-8 illustrates a common hot-standby implementation on a single blade server. Notice
that the BladeCenter server NICs are configured into a team that shares the same IP address
across both NICs. Because only one link can be active at a time, the hot-standby feature con-
trols the NIC failover by having the Standby switch disable its internal ports (holding down the
server links).
IF 1: 174.14.20.110
IF 2: 10.1.1.110
VIR 1: 174.14.20.100
VIR 2: 10.1.1.100
Active
GbESM 1
NIC 1 IP = 10.0.1.1
Server 1
Internet
Hot Standby
GbESM 2
NIC 1 IP = 10.0.1.2
Server 2
Enterprise
Routing Switch
IF 1: 174.14.20.111
IF 2: 10.1.1.111
VIR 1: 174.14.20.100
VIR 2: 10.1.1.100
= Active Links
= Standby Links
Figure 13-8 Hot-Standby Configuration
Task 1: Configure GbESM 1
1. On GbESM 1, configure the interfaces for clients (174.14.20.110) and servers (10.1.1.110).
/cfg/l3/if 1
>> IP Interface 1# addr 174.14.20.110
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Define IP address for interface 1)
(Enable interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# ..
>> Layer 3# if 2
>> IP Interface 2# addr 10.1.1.110
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Define IP address for interface 2)
(Enable interface 2)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
2. Configure Virtual Interface Routers.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/on
(Turn on VRRP)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 1(Select Virtual Router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# if 1
(Enable VR 1)
(Select the Virtual Router ID)
(Select interface for VR 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# addr 174.14.20.100(Define IP address for VR 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select Virtual Router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# vrid 2
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# if 2
(Enable VR 2)
(Select the Virtual Router ID)
(Select interface for VR 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# addr 10.1.1.100 (Define IP address for VR 2)
3. Enable VRRP Hot Standby.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/hotstan ena
(Enable Hot Standby)
4. Configure VRRP Group parameters. Set the VRRP priority to 101, so that this switch is
the Master.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# if 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# prio 101
(Enable Virtual Router Group)
(Set Virtual Router ID for Group)
(Set interface for Group)
(Set VRRP priority to 101)
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# track/ports ena(Enable tracking on ports)
5. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally. Apply and save changes.
/cfg/l2/stg 1/off
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# apply
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# save
(Turn off Spanning Tree)
(Apply changes)
240 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Task 2: Configure GbESM 2
1. On GbESM 1, configure the interfaces for clients (174.14.20.111) and servers (10.1.1.111).
/cfg/l3/if 1
>> IP Interface 1# addr 174.14.20.111
>> IP Interface 1# ena
(Define IP address for interface 1)
(Enable interface 1)
>> IP Interface 1# ..
>> Layer 3# if 2
>> IP Interface 2# addr 10.1.1.111
>> IP Interface 2# ena
(Define IP address for interface 2)
(Enable interface 2)
2. Configure Virtual Interface Routers.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/on
(Turn on VRRP)
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 1(Select Virtual Router 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# if 1
(Enable VR 1)
(Select the Virtual Router ID)
(Select interface for VR 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# addr 174.14.20.100(Define IP address for VR 1)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 1# ..
>> Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol# vr 2(Select Virtual Router 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# vrid 2
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# if 2
(Enable VR 2)
(Select the Virtual Router ID)
(Select interface for VR 2)
>> VRRP Virtual Router 2# addr 10.1.1.100 (Define IP address for VR 2)
3. Enable VRRP Hot Standby.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/hotstan ena
(Enable Hot Standby)
4. Configure VRRP Group parameters. Use the default VRRP priority of 100, so that this
switch is the Standby.
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# ena
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# vrid 1
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# if 1
(Enable Virtual Router Group)
(Set Virtual Router ID for Group)
(Set interface for Group)
>> VRRP Virtual Router Group# track/ports ena(Enable tracking on ports)
42C4911, January 2007
Chapter 13: High Availability „ 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
5. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally. Apply and save changes.
/cfg/l2/stg 1/off
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# apply
>> Spanning Tree Group 1# save
(Turn off Spanning Tree)
(Apply changes)
242 „ Chapter 13: High Availability
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
244
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Monitoring Ports
that is configured to receive a copy of all packets that are forwarded from the mirrored port.
Alteon OS enables you to mirror port traffic for all layer 2 and layer 3. Port mirroring can be
used as a troubleshooting tool or to enhance the security of your network. For example, an IDS
server can be connected to the monitor port to detect intruders attacking the network.
As shown in Figure A-1, port EXT3 is monitoring ingress traffic (traffic entering the switch)
on port EXT1 and egress traffic (traffic leaving the switch) on port EXT2. You can attach a
device to port EXT3 to monitor the traffic on ports EXT1 and EXT2.
Ingress
Mirrored ports
Egress
Monitoring port
Figure A-1 Monitoring Ports
Figure A-1 shows two mirrored ports monitored by a single port. Similarly, you can have a sin-
gle or groups of:
„
„
one mirrored port to one monitored port
more than two mirrored ports to one monitored port
Alteon OS does not support a single port being monitored by multiple ports.
Ingress and egress traffic is duplicated and sent to the monitor port after processing.
NOTE – The GbESM cannot mirror LACPDU packets.
246 „ Appendix A: Troubleshooting
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
NOTE – Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports.
Port Mirroring behavior
This section describes the composition of monitored packets in the GbE Switch Module, based
on the configuration of the ports.
If a tagged port's PVID is the same as its VLAN ID, then the egress traffic on that port is
untagged. Therefore, the following port-mirroring cases are differentiated, as described below:
„
Tagged or untagged frames from mirrored ports whose VLAN ID is the same as the moni-
toring port's PVID: mirrored frames viewed at the monitoring port are untagged
„
Tagged or untagged frames from mirrored ports whose VLAN ID is different than the
monitoring port's PVID: mirrored frames viewed at the monitoring port are tagged with
the VLAN ID of ingress/egress port for ingress/egress mirroring respectively.
Layer 2 Port Mirroring
In this scenario, you observe Layer 2 port mirroring.
„
Same VLAN as Mirrored Port
†
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Untagged packet
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which both ports belong
†
Both ports untagged: Untagged packet
„
Different VLAN from Mirrored Port
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of mirrored port
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Tagged packet with VID of mirrored
port
†
†
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of mirrored
port
Both ports untagged: Tagged packet with VID of mirrored port
42C4911, January 2007
Appendix A: Troubleshooting „ 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Layer 3 Port Mirroring
(Monitoring Port and Egress Port in the same GEA)
In this scenario, you observe Layer 3 port mirroring on an egress port, and both the egress port
and the monitoring port are in the same Gigabit Ethernet Aggregator (GEA) unit. To find out
which GEA unit each port resides on, use the /info/geaportcommand.
The monitoring port always shows a tagged packet with a VLAN ID (VID) of the egress port.
NOTE – In general, the GbESM mirrors all Layer 3 ingress packets after the packets are routed,
that is, all Layer 3 packets observed at the monitoring port have source MAC address, destina-
tion MAC address, VLAN, TTL, IP checksum changed as if they have gone through the rout-
ing process to the egress port.
248 „ Appendix A: Troubleshooting
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Layer 3 Port Mirroring (Both Ports in Different GEAs)
In this scenario, you observe Layer 3 port mirroring on an egress port, but the egress port and
the monitoring port reside on different Gigabit Ethernet Aggregator (GEA) units. To find out
which GEA unit each port resides on, use the /info/geaportcommand.
NOTE – In general, the GbESM mirrors all Layer 3 ingress packets after the packets are routed,
that is, all Layer 3 packets observed at the monitoring port have source MAC address, destina-
tion MAC address, VLAN, TTL, IP checksum changed as if they have gone through the rout-
ing process to the egress port.
„
„
Same VLAN as Mirrored Port
†
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Untagged packet
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
†
Both ports untagged: Untagged packet
Different VLAN from Mirrored Port
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
†
†
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
Both ports untagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
NOTE – When the monitoring port belongs to a different VLAN, all mirrored packets have
an 802.1q tag field with the VID of the VLAN to which the mirrored port belongs. The VID
included in the tag field depends on which port is monitored.
For example, assume a packet traverses from port EXT1 (VLAN 1) to EXT2 (VLAN 2), and is
monitored on port EXT3. When you monitor EXT1, the packet’s tag includes the VID of
VLAN 1. When you monitor EXT2, the packet’s tag includes the VID of VLAN 2.
42C4911, January 2007
Appendix A: Troubleshooting „ 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Layer 3 Port Mirroring
(MP Packets, Both Ports in the Same GEA)
MP packets are generated by the management processor, such as routing packets between
direct interfaces. In this scenario, the mirrored port and the monitoring port reside on the same
Gigabit Ethernet Aggregator (GEA) unit. To find out which GEA unit each port resides on, use
the /info/geaportcommand.
The monitoring port always shows a tagged packet with a VLAN ID (VID) of the ingress port.
Layer 3 Port Mirroring
(MP Packets, Mirrored Port and Monitoring Port in Different GEAs)
MP packets are generated by the management processor, such as a ping to the switch inter-
faces. In this scenario, the mirrored port and the monitoring port reside on different Gigabit
Ethernet Aggregator (GEA) units. To find out which GEA unit each port resides on, use
the /info/geaportcommand.
NOTE – The switch doesn’t monitor Layer 3 egress-routed packets from the MP when the mir-
ror port and the monitoring port are in different VLANs.
„
Same VLAN as Mirrored Port
†
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Untagged packet
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
†
Both ports untagged: Untagged packet
„
Different VLAN from Mirrored Port
†
†
Both ports tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
Mirrored port tagged, Monitoring port untagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
†
†
Mirrored port untagged, Monitoring port tagged: Tagged packet with VID of the
VLAN to which the ports belong
Both ports untagged: Tagged packet with VID of the VLAN to which the ports belong
NOTE – When the monitoring port belongs to a different VLAN, all mirrored packets have
an 802.1q tag field with the VID of the VLAN to which the mirrored port belongs. The VID
included in the tag field depends on which port is monitored.
For example, assume a packet traverses from port EXT1 (VLAN 1) to EXT2 (VLAN 2), and is
monitored on port EXT3. When you monitor EXT1, the packet’s tag includes the VID of
VLAN 1. When you monitor EXT2, the packet’s tag includes the VID of VLAN 2.
250 „ Appendix A: Troubleshooting
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Configuring Port Mirroring
To configure port mirroring for the example shown in Figure A-1,
1. Specify the monitoring port.
>> # /cfg/pmirr/monport EXT3
(Select port EXT3 for monitoring)
2. Select the ports that you want to mirror.
>> Port EXT3 # add EXT1
(Select port EXT1 to mirror)
>> Enter port mirror direction [in, out, or both]: in
(Monitor ingress traffic on port EXT1)
(Select port EXT2 to mirror)
>> Enter port mirror direction [in, out, or both]: out
(Monitor egress traffic on port EXT2)
>> Port EXT3 # add EXT2
3. Enable port mirroring.
>> # /cfg/pmirr/mirr ena
(Enable port mirroring)
4. Apply and save the configuration.
>> PortMirroring# apply
>> PortMirroring# save
(Apply the configuration)
(Save the configuration)
42C4911, January 2007
Appendix A: Troubleshooting „ 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
5. View the current configuration.
>> PortMirroring# cur
(Display the current settings)
Port mirroring is enabled
Monitoring Ports
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
Mirrored Ports
none
none
none
none
none
INT5
-----
-----
-----
EXT1
none
none
EXT2
EXT3
(EXT1, in) (EXT2, out)
EXT4
EXT5
EXT6
none
none
none
252 „ Appendix A: Troubleshooting
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX B
RADIUS Server Configuration Notes
Use the following information to modify your RADIUS configuration files for the Nortel
Networks BaySecure Access Control RADIUS server, to provide authentication for users of
the GbE Switch Module.
1. Create a dictionary file called alteon.dct, with the following content:
###################################################################
# alteon.dct - RADLINX Alteon dictionary
#
# (See README.DCT for more details on the format of this file)
###################################################################
#
# Use the Radius specification attributes in lieu of the
# RADLINX Alteon ones
#
@radius.dct
#
# Define additional RADLINX Alteon parameters
# (add RADLINX Alteon specific attributes below)
ATTRIBUTE Radlinx-Vendor-Specific 26 [vid=648 data=string] R
##################################################################
# alteon.dct - RADLINX Alteon dictionary
###################################################################
#Define Alteon GbESM Layer 2 & Layer 3 dictionary
#@radius.dct
@alteon.dct
VALUE
VALUE
Service-Type
Service-Type
user
oper
255
252
##################################################################
42C4911, January 2007
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
2. Open the dictiona.dcmfile, and add the following line (as in the example):
„ @alteon.dct
###################################################################
# dictiona.dcm
###################################################################
# Generic Radius
@radius.dct
#
# Specific Implementations (vendor specific)
#
@pprtl2l3.dct
@acc.dct
@accessbd.dct
@alteon.dct
.
.
.
##################################################################
# dictiona.dcm
##################################################################
3. Open the vendor file (vendor.ini), and add the following data to the Vendor-Product
identification list:
vendor-product
dictionary
ignore-ports
help-id
= Alteon Blade-server module
= alteon
= no
= 0
254 „ Appendix B: RADIUS Server Configuration Notes
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
DIP (Destination IP
Address)
The destination IP address of a frame.
Dport (Destination
Port)
The destination port (application socket: for example, http-80/https-443/DNS-53)
NAT (Network Address Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another
Translation)
address, network address translation can be said to have taken place. In general, half NAT
is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another.
Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. No NAT is
when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated.
Preemption
Priority
In VRRP, preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into
backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority.
In VRRP, the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). Min-
imum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Default is 100. A higher number will win out
for master designation.
Proto (Protocol)
The protocol of a frame. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header
adherent to the IP specification (for example, TCP, UDP, OSPF, ICMP, and so on.)
SIP (Source IP Address) The source IP address of a frame.
SPort (Source Port)
Tracking
The source port (application socket: for example, HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).
In VRRP, a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation
(with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configura-
tion.
You can track the following:
„ ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Web switch (increments priority by 2 for each)
„ ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each)
„ vrs: Number of virtual routers in master mode on the switch
VIR (Virtual Interface
Router)
A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual rout-
ers.
42C4911, January 2007
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
Virtual Router
A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP, as defined in RFC 2338. One vir-
tual router is associated with an IP interface. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch
is assigned. All IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Modules must be in a VLAN. If there is
more than one VLAN defined on the Web switch, then the VRRP broadcasts will only be
sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member.
VRID (Virtual Router
Identifier)
In VRRP, a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC
address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The VRRP MAC
address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. If you have a VRRP address
that two switches are sharing, then the VRID number needs to be identical on both
switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with.
VRRP (Virtual Router
A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol.
Redundancy Protocol) The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that
is always available. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or
listening for advertisements. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an
address such as 224.0.0.18.
With VRRP, one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The master is
always advertising via the broadcasts. The backup switch is always listening for the broad-
casts. Should the master stop advertising, the backup will take over ownership of the
VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The switch announces this
change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP, and advertise-
ments. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to
the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. For a more
detailed description, refer to RFC 2338.
256 „ Glossary
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Symbols
C
........................................................................ 161
[ ]....................................................................... 18
Cisco EtherChannel .......................................96, 99
CIST ................................................................121
Class of Service queue .......................................140
command conventions..........................................18
Command Line Interface ....................................193
configuration rules
Numerics
802.1Q VLAN tagging......................................... 80
port mirroring ...............................................96
spanning tree ................................................96
Trunking......................................................96
VLANs........................................................96
configuring
A
accessing the switch
LDAP ......................................................... 53
RADIUS authentication................................. 44
security........................................................ 43
using the Browser-based Interface................... 33
active-active redundancy.................................... 228
administrator account........................................... 47
aggregating routes ............................................. 178
example..................................................... 185
application ports................................................ 127
authenticating, in OSPF ..................................... 199
autonomous systems (AS) .................................. 192
BGP failover ..............................................182
IP routing...................................................148
OSPF.........................................................204
port trunking.................................................98
spanning tree groups....................................113
D
default gateway .................................................147
configuration example .................................149
default password..................................................47
default route
OSPF.........................................................197
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)..........134
B
BBI
See Browser-Based Interface........................ 193
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)......................... 171
attributes.................................................... 180
failover configuration.................................. 182
route aggregation ........................................ 178
route maps ................................................. 174
selecting route paths.................................... 181
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ..................... 107
broadcast domains....................................... 75, 150
Browser-Based Interface.................................... 193
E
End user access control
configuring...................................................61
EtherChannel ......................................................94
as used with port trunking ........................96, 99
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPoL)
68
external routing .........................................172, 192
42C4911, January 2007
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
IP routing
cross-subnet example .................................. 145
F
Failover.............................................................218
failover
overview ....................................................227
fault tolerance
port trunking .................................................95
fragmenting jumbo frames ..........................144, 147
frame tagging. See VLANs tagging.
default gateway configuration....................... 149
IP interface configuration..................... 148, 151
IP subnets .................................................. 145
network diagram......................................... 145
subnet configuration example ....................... 148
switch-based topology ................................. 146
IP subnets ......................................................... 146
routing............................................... 145, 146
VLANs........................................................ 75
ISL Trunking ...................................................... 94
G
gateway. See default gateway.
J
H
jumbo frames
high-availability.................................................217
Host routes
OSPF.........................................................202
hot-standby redundancy......................................229
HP-OpenView .....................................................36
fragmenting to normal size................... 144, 147
routing............................................... 144, 147
L
LACP............................................................... 101
LDAP
authentication............................................... 53
Link Aggregation Control Protocol ..................... 101
logical segment. See IP subnets.
I
IBM Director.......................................................36
ICMP................................................................126
IEEE standards
LSAs................................................................ 191
802.1d........................................................106
802.1s ................................................117, 121
802.1x..........................................................68
IGMP........................................................126, 161
IGMP Relay ......................................................165
IGMP Snooping.................................................162
incoming route maps ..........................................175
internal routing ..........................................172, 192
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) ......161
IP address
M
management module............................................ 24
manual style conventions ..................................... 18
meter................................................................ 131
mirroring ports .................................................. 246
monitoring ports................................................ 246
MSTP............................................................... 121
multi-links between switches
using port trunking........................................ 93
multiple spanning tree groups ............................. 111
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol......................... 121
routing example...........................................148
IP interfaces
example configuration..........................148, 151
N
network management........................................... 36
258 „ Index
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
O
R
OSPF
RADIUS
area types................................................... 188
authentication ...............................................44
port 1812 and 1645......................................127
port 1813 ...................................................127
SSH/SCP .....................................................60
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.............................118
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).................118
redistributing routes ...........................174, 179, 185
redundancy
active-active ...............................................228
hot-standby ................................................229
re-mark.............................................................131
RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
advertisements............................................156
distance vector protocol ...............................155
hop count ...................................................155
metric ........................................................155
TCP/IP route information.......................16, 155
version 1 ....................................................155
route aggregation.......................................178, 185
route maps ........................................................174
configuring.................................................176
incoming and outgoing ................................175
route paths in BGP.............................................181
Router ID
OSPF.........................................................199
routers ......................................................146, 149
border........................................................192
peer...........................................................192
port trunking.................................................94
switch-based routing topology ......................146
routes, advertising..............................................192
routing..............................................................172
internal and external ....................................192
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
authentication............................................. 199
configuration examples........................205 to ??
default route............................................... 197
external routes............................................ 203
filtering criteria........................................... 126
host routes ................................................. 202
link state database....................................... 191
neighbors................................................... 191
overview.................................................... 188
redistributing routes ............................ 174, 179
route maps ......................................... 174, 176
route summarization.................................... 196
router ID.................................................... 199
virtual link ................................................. 198
outgoing route maps .......................................... 175
P
password
administrator account .................................... 47
default......................................................... 47
user account................................................. 47
Per Hop Behavior (PHB).................................... 134
port mirroring ................................................... 246
configuration rules ........................................ 96
Port Trunking...................................................... 95
port trunking....................................................... 95
configuration example................................... 97
description ................................................... 99
EtherChannel ............................................... 94
fault tolerance............................................... 95
ports
for services ................................................ 127
monitoring ................................................. 246
physical. See switch ports.
RSA keys............................................................59
RSTP................................................................118
priority value (802.1p) ....................................... 139
protocol types ................................................... 126
PVID (port VLAN ID)......................................... 77
PVLAN.............................................................. 87
S
SecurID ..............................................................60
security
LDAP authentication .....................................53
port mirroring .............................................246
RADIUS authentication .................................44
VLANs........................................................75
segmentation. See IP subnets.
42C4911, January 2007
Index „ 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alteon OS Application Guide
segments. See IP subnets.
U
service ports ......................................................127
SNMP.........................................................36, 193
HP-OpenView ..............................................36
spanning tree
UDP................................................................. 126
jumbo frame traffic fragmentation................. 147
user account........................................................ 47
configuration rules.........................................96
Spanning-Tree Protocol
multiple instances ........................................111
SSH
V
virtual interface router (VIR) .............................. 224
virtual link, OSPF.............................................. 198
Virtual Local Area Networks. See VLANs.
virtual router
ID numbering............................................. 231
virtual router group............................................ 229
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
RSA host and server keys ...............................59
SSH/SCP
configuring ...................................................56
statistical load distribution.....................................95
summarizing routes ............................................196
switch failover ...................................................227
switch ports VLANs membership ..........................79
tracking ..................................................... 230
VLANs
broadcast domains................................. 75, 150
configuration rules ........................................ 96
default PVID................................................ 77
example showing multiple VLANs ................. 85
ID numbers .................................................. 77
IP interface configuration............................. 151
multiple spanning trees ................................ 106
multiple VLANs ........................................... 80
port members ............................................... 79
PVID........................................................... 77
routing....................................................... 150
security........................................................ 75
Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................... 106
tagging ............................................... 79 to 86
topologies .................................................... 84
VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
active-active redundancy.............................. 228
hot-standby redundancy............................... 229
overview............................................ 224, 230
virtual interface router ................................. 224
virtual router ID numbering.......................... 231
vrid ........................................................... 224
T
TACACS+ ..........................................................48
tagging. See VLANs tagging.
TCP ..................................................................126
technical terms
port VLAN identifier (PVID)..........................80
tagged frame.................................................80
tagged member..............................................80
untagged frame..............................................80
untagged member ..........................................80
VLAN identifier (VID) ..................................80
text conventions...................................................18
thash .................................................................100
Trunk Hash algorithm.........................................100
Trunking
configuration rules.........................................96
typographic conventions .......................................18
260 „ Index
42C4911, January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|